blob: db0f70f176c3c8af776ebefb03f0420ea42810b7 [file] [log] [blame]
Bram Moolenaar88a42052021-11-21 21:13:36 +00001*syntax.txt* For Vim version 8.2. Last change: 2021 Nov 20
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002
3
4 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
5
6
7Syntax highlighting *syntax* *syntax-highlighting* *coloring*
8
9Syntax highlighting enables Vim to show parts of the text in another font or
10color. Those parts can be specific keywords or text matching a pattern. Vim
11doesn't parse the whole file (to keep it fast), so the highlighting has its
12limitations. Lexical highlighting might be a better name, but since everybody
13calls it syntax highlighting we'll stick with that.
14
15Vim supports syntax highlighting on all terminals. But since most ordinary
16terminals have very limited highlighting possibilities, it works best in the
17GUI version, gvim.
18
19In the User Manual:
20|usr_06.txt| introduces syntax highlighting.
21|usr_44.txt| introduces writing a syntax file.
22
231. Quick start |:syn-qstart|
242. Syntax files |:syn-files|
253. Syntax loading procedure |syntax-loading|
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100264. Converting to HTML |2html.vim|
275. Syntax file remarks |:syn-file-remarks|
286. Defining a syntax |:syn-define|
297. :syntax arguments |:syn-arguments|
308. Syntax patterns |:syn-pattern|
319. Syntax clusters |:syn-cluster|
Bram Moolenaarc8c88492018-12-27 23:59:26 +01003210. Including syntax files |:syn-include|
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +01003311. Synchronizing |:syn-sync|
3412. Listing syntax items |:syntax|
3513. Highlight command |:highlight|
3614. Linking groups |:highlight-link|
3715. Cleaning up |:syn-clear|
3816. Highlighting tags |tag-highlight|
3917. Window-local syntax |:ownsyntax|
4018. Color xterms |xterm-color|
4119. When syntax is slow |:syntime|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000042
43{Vi does not have any of these commands}
44
45Syntax highlighting is not available when the |+syntax| feature has been
46disabled at compile time.
47
48==============================================================================
491. Quick start *:syn-qstart*
50
51 *:syn-enable* *:syntax-enable*
52This command switches on syntax highlighting: >
53
54 :syntax enable
55
56What this command actually does is to execute the command >
57 :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
58
59If the VIM environment variable is not set, Vim will try to find
60the path in another way (see |$VIMRUNTIME|). Usually this works just
61fine. If it doesn't, try setting the VIM environment variable to the
62directory where the Vim stuff is located. For example, if your syntax files
Bram Moolenaar8024f932020-01-14 19:29:13 +010063are in the "/usr/vim/vim82/syntax" directory, set $VIMRUNTIME to
64"/usr/vim/vim82". You must do this in the shell, before starting Vim.
Bram Moolenaar01164a62017-11-02 22:58:42 +010065This command also sources the |menu.vim| script when the GUI is running or
66will start soon. See |'go-M'| about avoiding that.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000067
68 *:syn-on* *:syntax-on*
Bram Moolenaar4072ba52020-12-23 13:56:35 +010069The `:syntax enable` command will keep most of your current color settings.
70This allows using `:highlight` commands to set your preferred colors before or
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000071after using this command. If you want Vim to overrule your settings with the
72defaults, use: >
73 :syntax on
74<
75 *:hi-normal* *:highlight-normal*
76If you are running in the GUI, you can get white text on a black background
77with: >
78 :highlight Normal guibg=Black guifg=White
79For a color terminal see |:hi-normal-cterm|.
80For setting up your own colors syntax highlighting see |syncolor|.
81
Bram Moolenaar5666fcd2019-12-26 14:35:26 +010082NOTE: The syntax files on MS-Windows have lines that end in <CR><NL>.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000083The files for Unix end in <NL>. This means you should use the right type of
Bram Moolenaar5666fcd2019-12-26 14:35:26 +010084file for your system. Although on MS-Windows the right format is
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000085automatically selected if the 'fileformats' option is not empty.
86
87NOTE: When using reverse video ("gvim -fg white -bg black"), the default value
88of 'background' will not be set until the GUI window is opened, which is after
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +000089reading the |gvimrc|. This will cause the wrong default highlighting to be
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000090used. To set the default value of 'background' before switching on
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +000091highlighting, include the ":gui" command in the |gvimrc|: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000092
93 :gui " open window and set default for 'background'
94 :syntax on " start highlighting, use 'background' to set colors
95
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +000096NOTE: Using ":gui" in the |gvimrc| means that "gvim -f" won't start in the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000097foreground! Use ":gui -f" then.
98
Bram Moolenaar09092152010-08-08 16:38:42 +020099 *g:syntax_on*
100You can toggle the syntax on/off with this command: >
101 :if exists("g:syntax_on") | syntax off | else | syntax enable | endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000102
103To put this into a mapping, you can use: >
Bram Moolenaar09092152010-08-08 16:38:42 +0200104 :map <F7> :if exists("g:syntax_on") <Bar>
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000105 \ syntax off <Bar>
106 \ else <Bar>
107 \ syntax enable <Bar>
108 \ endif <CR>
109[using the |<>| notation, type this literally]
110
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000111Details:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000112The ":syntax" commands are implemented by sourcing a file. To see exactly how
113this works, look in the file:
114 command file ~
115 :syntax enable $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
116 :syntax on $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
117 :syntax manual $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/manual.vim
118 :syntax off $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
119Also see |syntax-loading|.
120
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100121NOTE: If displaying long lines is slow and switching off syntax highlighting
122makes it fast, consider setting the 'synmaxcol' option to a lower value.
123
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000124==============================================================================
1252. Syntax files *:syn-files*
126
127The syntax and highlighting commands for one language are normally stored in
128a syntax file. The name convention is: "{name}.vim". Where {name} is the
129name of the language, or an abbreviation (to fit the name in 8.3 characters,
130a requirement in case the file is used on a DOS filesystem).
131Examples:
132 c.vim perl.vim java.vim html.vim
133 cpp.vim sh.vim csh.vim
134
135The syntax file can contain any Ex commands, just like a vimrc file. But
136the idea is that only commands for a specific language are included. When a
137language is a superset of another language, it may include the other one,
138for example, the cpp.vim file could include the c.vim file: >
139 :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/c.vim
140
141The .vim files are normally loaded with an autocommand. For example: >
142 :au Syntax c runtime! syntax/c.vim
143 :au Syntax cpp runtime! syntax/cpp.vim
144These commands are normally in the file $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/synload.vim.
145
146
147MAKING YOUR OWN SYNTAX FILES *mysyntaxfile*
148
149When you create your own syntax files, and you want to have Vim use these
150automatically with ":syntax enable", do this:
151
1521. Create your user runtime directory. You would normally use the first item
153 of the 'runtimepath' option. Example for Unix: >
154 mkdir ~/.vim
155
1562. Create a directory in there called "syntax". For Unix: >
157 mkdir ~/.vim/syntax
158
1593. Write the Vim syntax file. Or download one from the internet. Then write
160 it in your syntax directory. For example, for the "mine" syntax: >
161 :w ~/.vim/syntax/mine.vim
162
163Now you can start using your syntax file manually: >
164 :set syntax=mine
165You don't have to exit Vim to use this.
166
167If you also want Vim to detect the type of file, see |new-filetype|.
168
169If you are setting up a system with many users and you don't want each user
170to add the same syntax file, you can use another directory from 'runtimepath'.
171
172
173ADDING TO AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE *mysyntaxfile-add*
174
175If you are mostly satisfied with an existing syntax file, but would like to
176add a few items or change the highlighting, follow these steps:
177
1781. Create your user directory from 'runtimepath', see above.
179
1802. Create a directory in there called "after/syntax". For Unix: >
181 mkdir ~/.vim/after
182 mkdir ~/.vim/after/syntax
183
1843. Write a Vim script that contains the commands you want to use. For
185 example, to change the colors for the C syntax: >
186 highlight cComment ctermfg=Green guifg=Green
187
1884. Write that file in the "after/syntax" directory. Use the name of the
189 syntax, with ".vim" added. For our C syntax: >
190 :w ~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim
191
192That's it. The next time you edit a C file the Comment color will be
193different. You don't even have to restart Vim.
194
Bram Moolenaar5313dcb2005-02-22 08:56:13 +0000195If you have multiple files, you can use the filetype as the directory name.
196All the "*.vim" files in this directory will be used, for example:
197 ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/one.vim
198 ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/two.vim
199
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000200
201REPLACING AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE *mysyntaxfile-replace*
202
203If you don't like a distributed syntax file, or you have downloaded a new
204version, follow the same steps as for |mysyntaxfile| above. Just make sure
205that you write the syntax file in a directory that is early in 'runtimepath'.
Bram Moolenaar61d35bd2012-03-28 20:51:51 +0200206Vim will only load the first syntax file found, assuming that it sets
207b:current_syntax.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000208
209
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100210NAMING CONVENTIONS *group-name* *{group-name}* *E669* *W18*
211
212A syntax group name is to be used for syntax items that match the same kind of
213thing. These are then linked to a highlight group that specifies the color.
214A syntax group name doesn't specify any color or attributes itself.
215
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000216The name for a highlight or syntax group must consist of ASCII letters, digits
Bram Moolenaar2b8388b2015-02-28 13:11:45 +0100217and the underscore. As a regexp: "[a-zA-Z0-9_]*". However, Vim does not give
218an error when using other characters.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000219
Bram Moolenaareab6dff2020-03-01 19:06:45 +0100220To be able to allow each user to pick their favorite set of colors, there must
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000221be preferred names for highlight groups that are common for many languages.
222These are the suggested group names (if syntax highlighting works properly
223you can see the actual color, except for "Ignore"):
224
225 *Comment any comment
226
227 *Constant any constant
228 String a string constant: "this is a string"
229 Character a character constant: 'c', '\n'
230 Number a number constant: 234, 0xff
231 Boolean a boolean constant: TRUE, false
232 Float a floating point constant: 2.3e10
233
234 *Identifier any variable name
235 Function function name (also: methods for classes)
236
237 *Statement any statement
238 Conditional if, then, else, endif, switch, etc.
239 Repeat for, do, while, etc.
240 Label case, default, etc.
241 Operator "sizeof", "+", "*", etc.
242 Keyword any other keyword
243 Exception try, catch, throw
244
245 *PreProc generic Preprocessor
246 Include preprocessor #include
247 Define preprocessor #define
248 Macro same as Define
249 PreCondit preprocessor #if, #else, #endif, etc.
250
251 *Type int, long, char, etc.
252 StorageClass static, register, volatile, etc.
253 Structure struct, union, enum, etc.
254 Typedef A typedef
255
256 *Special any special symbol
257 SpecialChar special character in a constant
258 Tag you can use CTRL-] on this
259 Delimiter character that needs attention
260 SpecialComment special things inside a comment
261 Debug debugging statements
262
263 *Underlined text that stands out, HTML links
264
Bram Moolenaar4f99eae2010-07-24 15:56:43 +0200265 *Ignore left blank, hidden |hl-Ignore|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000266
267 *Error any erroneous construct
268
269 *Todo anything that needs extra attention; mostly the
270 keywords TODO FIXME and XXX
271
272The names marked with * are the preferred groups; the others are minor groups.
273For the preferred groups, the "syntax.vim" file contains default highlighting.
274The minor groups are linked to the preferred groups, so they get the same
275highlighting. You can override these defaults by using ":highlight" commands
276after sourcing the "syntax.vim" file.
277
278Note that highlight group names are not case sensitive. "String" and "string"
279can be used for the same group.
280
281The following names are reserved and cannot be used as a group name:
282 NONE ALL ALLBUT contains contained
283
Bram Moolenaar4f99eae2010-07-24 15:56:43 +0200284 *hl-Ignore*
285When using the Ignore group, you may also consider using the conceal
286mechanism. See |conceal|.
287
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000288==============================================================================
2893. Syntax loading procedure *syntax-loading*
290
291This explains the details that happen when the command ":syntax enable" is
292issued. When Vim initializes itself, it finds out where the runtime files are
293located. This is used here as the variable |$VIMRUNTIME|.
294
295":syntax enable" and ":syntax on" do the following:
296
297 Source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
298 |
299 +- Clear out any old syntax by sourcing $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
300 |
301 +- Source first syntax/synload.vim in 'runtimepath'
302 | |
303 | +- Setup the colors for syntax highlighting. If a color scheme is
304 | | defined it is loaded again with ":colors {name}". Otherwise
305 | | ":runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim" is used. ":syntax on" overrules
306 | | existing colors, ":syntax enable" only sets groups that weren't
307 | | set yet.
308 | |
309 | +- Set up syntax autocmds to load the appropriate syntax file when
310 | | the 'syntax' option is set. *synload-1*
311 | |
312 | +- Source the user's optional file, from the |mysyntaxfile| variable.
313 | This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only. *synload-2*
314 |
315 +- Do ":filetype on", which does ":runtime! filetype.vim". It loads any
316 | filetype.vim files found. It should always Source
317 | $VIMRUNTIME/filetype.vim, which does the following.
318 | |
319 | +- Install autocmds based on suffix to set the 'filetype' option
320 | | This is where the connection between file name and file type is
321 | | made for known file types. *synload-3*
322 | |
323 | +- Source the user's optional file, from the *myfiletypefile*
324 | | variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only.
325 | | *synload-4*
326 | |
327 | +- Install one autocommand which sources scripts.vim when no file
328 | | type was detected yet. *synload-5*
329 | |
330 | +- Source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim, to setup the Syntax menu. |menu.vim|
331 |
332 +- Install a FileType autocommand to set the 'syntax' option when a file
333 | type has been detected. *synload-6*
334 |
335 +- Execute syntax autocommands to start syntax highlighting for each
336 already loaded buffer.
337
338
339Upon loading a file, Vim finds the relevant syntax file as follows:
340
341 Loading the file triggers the BufReadPost autocommands.
342 |
343 +- If there is a match with one of the autocommands from |synload-3|
344 | (known file types) or |synload-4| (user's file types), the 'filetype'
345 | option is set to the file type.
346 |
347 +- The autocommand at |synload-5| is triggered. If the file type was not
348 | found yet, then scripts.vim is searched for in 'runtimepath'. This
349 | should always load $VIMRUNTIME/scripts.vim, which does the following.
350 | |
351 | +- Source the user's optional file, from the *myscriptsfile*
352 | | variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only.
353 | |
354 | +- If the file type is still unknown, check the contents of the file,
355 | again with checks like "getline(1) =~ pattern" as to whether the
356 | file type can be recognized, and set 'filetype'.
357 |
358 +- When the file type was determined and 'filetype' was set, this
359 | triggers the FileType autocommand |synload-6| above. It sets
360 | 'syntax' to the determined file type.
361 |
362 +- When the 'syntax' option was set above, this triggers an autocommand
363 | from |synload-1| (and |synload-2|). This find the main syntax file in
364 | 'runtimepath', with this command:
365 | runtime! syntax/<name>.vim
366 |
367 +- Any other user installed FileType or Syntax autocommands are
368 triggered. This can be used to change the highlighting for a specific
369 syntax.
370
371==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +01003724. Conversion to HTML *2html.vim* *convert-to-HTML*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000373
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +01003742html is not a syntax file itself, but a script that converts the current
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200375window into HTML. Vim opens a new window in which it builds the HTML file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000376
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200377After you save the resulting file, you can view it with any browser. The
378colors should be exactly the same as you see them in Vim. With
379|g:html_line_ids| you can jump to specific lines by adding (for example) #L123
380or #123 to the end of the URL in your browser's address bar. And with
Bram Moolenaar543b7ef2013-06-01 14:50:56 +0200381|g:html_dynamic_folds| enabled, you can show or hide the text that is folded
382in Vim.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200383
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000384You are not supposed to set the 'filetype' or 'syntax' option to "2html"!
385Source the script to convert the current file: >
386
387 :runtime! syntax/2html.vim
388<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200389Many variables affect the output of 2html.vim; see below. Any of the on/off
390options listed below can be enabled or disabled by setting them explicitly to
391the desired value, or restored to their default by removing the variable using
392|:unlet|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000393
394Remarks:
Bram Moolenaar076e8b22010-08-05 21:54:00 +0200395- Some truly ancient browsers may not show the background colors.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000396- From most browsers you can also print the file (in color)!
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200397- The latest TOhtml may actually work with older versions of Vim, but some
Bram Moolenaar166af9b2010-11-16 20:34:40 +0100398 features such as conceal support will not function, and the colors may be
399 incorrect for an old Vim without GUI support compiled in.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000400
401Here is an example how to run the script over all .c and .h files from a
402Unix shell: >
403 for f in *.[ch]; do gvim -f +"syn on" +"run! syntax/2html.vim" +"wq" +"q" $f; done
404<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200405 *g:html_start_line* *g:html_end_line*
406To restrict the conversion to a range of lines, use a range with the |:TOhtml|
407command below, or set "g:html_start_line" and "g:html_end_line" to the first
408and last line to be converted. Example, using the last set Visual area: >
409
410 :let g:html_start_line = line("'<")
411 :let g:html_end_line = line("'>")
412 :runtime! syntax/2html.vim
413<
414 *:TOhtml*
415:[range]TOhtml The ":TOhtml" command is defined in a standard plugin.
416 This command will source |2html.vim| for you. When a
Bram Moolenaar60cce2f2015-10-13 23:21:27 +0200417 range is given, this command sets |g:html_start_line|
418 and |g:html_end_line| to the start and end of the
419 range, respectively. Default range is the entire
420 buffer.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200421
Bram Moolenaar60cce2f2015-10-13 23:21:27 +0200422 If the current window is part of a |diff|, unless
423 |g:html_diff_one_file| is set, :TOhtml will convert
424 all windows which are part of the diff in the current
425 tab and place them side-by-side in a <table> element
426 in the generated HTML. With |g:html_line_ids| you can
427 jump to lines in specific windows with (for example)
428 #W1L42 for line 42 in the first diffed window, or
429 #W3L87 for line 87 in the third.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200430
431 Examples: >
432
433 :10,40TOhtml " convert lines 10-40 to html
434 :'<,'>TOhtml " convert current/last visual selection
435 :TOhtml " convert entire buffer
436<
437 *g:html_diff_one_file*
438Default: 0.
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200439When 0, and using |:TOhtml| all windows involved in a |diff| in the current tab
440page are converted to HTML and placed side-by-side in a <table> element. When
4411, only the current buffer is converted.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200442Example: >
443
444 let g:html_diff_one_file = 1
445<
446 *g:html_whole_filler*
447Default: 0.
448When 0, if |g:html_diff_one_file| is 1, a sequence of more than 3 filler lines
449is displayed as three lines with the middle line mentioning the total number
450of inserted lines.
451When 1, always display all inserted lines as if |g:html_diff_one_file| were
452not set.
453>
454 :let g:html_whole_filler = 1
455<
456 *TOhtml-performance* *g:html_no_progress*
457Default: 0.
458When 0, display a progress bar in the statusline for each major step in the
4592html.vim conversion process.
460When 1, do not display the progress bar. This offers a minor speed improvement
461but you won't have any idea how much longer the conversion might take; for big
462files it can take a long time!
463Example: >
464
465 let g:html_no_progress = 1
466<
467You can obtain better performance improvements by also instructing Vim to not
468run interactively, so that too much time is not taken to redraw as the script
469moves through the buffer, switches windows, and the like: >
470
471 vim -E -s -c "let g:html_no_progress=1" -c "syntax on" -c "set ft=c" -c "runtime syntax/2html.vim" -cwqa myfile.c
472<
473Note that the -s flag prevents loading your .vimrc and any plugins, so you
474need to explicitly source/enable anything that will affect the HTML
475conversion. See |-E| and |-s-ex| for details. It is probably best to create a
476script to replace all the -c commands and use it with the -u flag instead of
477specifying each command separately.
478
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100479 *hl-TOhtmlProgress* *TOhtml-progress-color*
480When displayed, the progress bar will show colored boxes along the statusline
481as the HTML conversion proceeds. By default, the background color as the
482current "DiffDelete" highlight group is used. If "DiffDelete" and "StatusLine"
483have the same background color, TOhtml will automatically adjust the color to
484differ. If you do not like the automatically selected colors, you can define
485your own highlight colors for the progress bar. Example: >
486
487 hi TOhtmlProgress guifg=#c0ffee ctermbg=7
488<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200489 *g:html_number_lines*
490Default: current 'number' setting.
491When 0, buffer text is displayed in the generated HTML without line numbering.
492When 1, a column of line numbers is added to the generated HTML with the same
493highlighting as the line number column in Vim (|hl-LineNr|).
494Force line numbers even if 'number' is not set: >
495 :let g:html_number_lines = 1
496Force to omit the line numbers: >
497 :let g:html_number_lines = 0
498Go back to the default to use 'number' by deleting the variable: >
499 :unlet g:html_number_lines
500<
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200501 *g:html_line_ids*
502Default: 1 if |g:html_number_lines| is set, 0 otherwise.
503When 1, adds an HTML id attribute to each line number, or to an empty <span>
504inserted for that purpose if no line numbers are shown. This ID attribute
505takes the form of L123 for single-buffer HTML pages, or W2L123 for diff-view
506pages, and is used to jump to a specific line (in a specific window of a diff
507view). Javascript is inserted to open any closed dynamic folds
Bram Moolenaar34401cc2014-08-29 15:12:19 +0200508(|g:html_dynamic_folds|) containing the specified line before jumping. The
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200509javascript also allows omitting the window ID in the url, and the leading L.
510For example: >
511
512 page.html#L123 jumps to line 123 in a single-buffer file
513 page.html#123 does the same
514
515 diff.html#W1L42 jumps to line 42 in the first window in a diff
516 diff.html#42 does the same
517<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200518 *g:html_use_css*
519Default: 1.
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100520When 1, generate valid HTML 5 markup with CSS styling, supported in all modern
521browsers and many old browsers.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200522When 0, generate <font> tags and similar outdated markup. This is not
523recommended but it may work better in really old browsers, email clients,
524forum posts, and similar situations where basic CSS support is unavailable.
525Example: >
526 :let g:html_use_css = 0
527<
528 *g:html_ignore_conceal*
529Default: 0.
530When 0, concealed text is removed from the HTML and replaced with a character
531from |:syn-cchar| or 'listchars' as appropriate, depending on the current
532value of 'conceallevel'.
533When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML, even if it is
534|conceal|ed.
535
536Either of the following commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is
537included in the generated HTML (unless it is folded): >
538 :let g:html_ignore_conceal = 1
539 :setl conceallevel=0
540<
541 *g:html_ignore_folding*
542Default: 0.
543When 0, text in a closed fold is replaced by the text shown for the fold in
544Vim (|fold-foldtext|). See |g:html_dynamic_folds| if you also want to allow
545the user to expand the fold as in Vim to see the text inside.
546When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML; whether the
547text is in a fold has no impact at all. |g:html_dynamic_folds| has no effect.
548
549Either of these commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is included
550in the generated HTML (unless it is concealed): >
551 zR
552 :let g:html_ignore_folding = 1
553<
554 *g:html_dynamic_folds*
555Default: 0.
556When 0, text in a closed fold is not included at all in the generated HTML.
557When 1, generate javascript to open a fold and show the text within, just like
558in Vim.
559
560Setting this variable to 1 causes 2html.vim to always use CSS for styling,
561regardless of what |g:html_use_css| is set to.
562
563This variable is ignored when |g:html_ignore_folding| is set.
564>
565 :let g:html_dynamic_folds = 1
566<
567 *g:html_no_foldcolumn*
568Default: 0.
569When 0, if |g:html_dynamic_folds| is 1, generate a column of text similar to
570Vim's foldcolumn (|fold-foldcolumn|) the user can click on to toggle folds
571open or closed. The minimum width of the generated text column is the current
572'foldcolumn' setting.
573When 1, do not generate this column; instead, hovering the mouse cursor over
574folded text will open the fold as if |g:html_hover_unfold| were set.
575>
576 :let g:html_no_foldcolumn = 1
577<
578 *TOhtml-uncopyable-text* *g:html_prevent_copy*
579Default: empty string.
580This option prevents certain regions of the generated HTML from being copied,
581when you select all text in document rendered in a browser and copy it. Useful
582for allowing users to copy-paste only the source text even if a fold column or
583line numbers are shown in the generated content. Specify regions to be
584affected in this way as follows:
585 f: fold column
586 n: line numbers (also within fold text)
587 t: fold text
588 d: diff filler
589
590Example, to make the fold column and line numbers uncopyable: >
591 :let g:html_prevent_copy = "fn"
592<
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100593The method used to prevent copying in the generated page depends on the value
594of |g:html_use_input_for_pc|.
595
596 *g:html_use_input_for_pc*
597Default: "fallback"
598If |g:html_prevent_copy| is non-empty, then:
599
600When "all", read-only <input> elements are used in place of normal text for
601uncopyable regions. In some browsers, especially older browsers, after
602selecting an entire page and copying the selection, the <input> tags are not
603pasted with the page text. If |g:html_no_invalid| is 0, the <input> tags have
604invalid type; this works in more browsers, but the page will not validate.
605Note: this method does NOT work in recent versions of Chrome and equivalent
606browsers; the <input> tags get pasted with the text.
607
608When "fallback" (default value), the same <input> elements are generated for
609older browsers, but newer browsers (detected by CSS feature query) hide the
610<input> elements and instead use generated content in an ::before pseudoelement
611to display the uncopyable text. This method should work with the largest
612number of browsers, both old and new.
613
614When "none", the <input> elements are not generated at all. Only the
615generated-content method is used. This means that old browsers, notably
616Internet Explorer, will either copy the text intended not to be copyable, or
617the non-copyable text may not appear at all. However, this is the most
618standards-based method, and there will be much less markup.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200619
620 *g:html_no_invalid*
621Default: 0.
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100622When 0, if |g:html_prevent_copy| is non-empty and |g:html_use_input_for_pc| is
623not "none", an invalid attribute is intentionally inserted into the <input>
624element for the uncopyable areas. This prevents pasting the <input> elements
625in some applications. Specifically, some versions of Microsoft Word will not
626paste the <input> elements if they contain this invalid attribute. When 1, no
627invalid markup is inserted, and the generated page should validate. However,
628<input> elements may be pasted into some applications and can be difficult to
629remove afterward.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200630
631 *g:html_hover_unfold*
632Default: 0.
633When 0, the only way to open a fold generated by 2html.vim with
634|g:html_dynamic_folds| set, is to click on the generated fold column.
635When 1, use CSS 2.0 to allow the user to open a fold by moving the mouse
636cursor over the displayed fold text. This is useful to allow users with
637disabled javascript to view the folded text.
638
639Note that old browsers (notably Internet Explorer 6) will not support this
640feature. Browser-specific markup for IE6 is included to fall back to the
641normal CSS1 styling so that the folds show up correctly for this browser, but
642they will not be openable without a foldcolumn.
643>
644 :let g:html_hover_unfold = 1
645<
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200646 *g:html_id_expr*
647Default: ""
648Dynamic folding and jumping to line IDs rely on unique IDs within the document
649to work. If generated HTML is copied into a larger document, these IDs are no
650longer guaranteed to be unique. Set g:html_id_expr to an expression Vim can
651evaluate to get a unique string to append to each ID used in a given document,
652so that the full IDs will be unique even when combined with other content in a
653larger HTML document. Example, to append _ and the buffer number to each ID: >
654
655 :let g:html_id_expr = '"_".bufnr("%")'
656<
657To append a string "_mystring" to the end of each ID: >
658
659 :let g:html_id_expr = '"_mystring"'
660<
661Note, when converting a diff view to HTML, the expression will only be
662evaluated for the first window in the diff, and the result used for all the
663windows.
664
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200665 *TOhtml-wrap-text* *g:html_pre_wrap*
666Default: current 'wrap' setting.
667When 0, if |g:html_no_pre| is 0 or unset, the text in the generated HTML does
668not wrap at the edge of the browser window.
669When 1, if |g:html_use_css| is 1, the CSS 2.0 "white-space:pre-wrap" value is
670used, causing the text to wrap at whitespace at the edge of the browser
671window.
672Explicitly enable text wrapping: >
673 :let g:html_pre_wrap = 1
674Explicitly disable wrapping: >
675 :let g:html_pre_wrap = 0
676Go back to default, determine wrapping from 'wrap' setting: >
677 :unlet g:html_pre_wrap
678<
679 *g:html_no_pre*
680Default: 0.
681When 0, buffer text in the generated HTML is surrounded by <pre>...</pre>
682tags. Series of whitespace is shown as in Vim without special markup, and tab
683characters can be included literally (see |g:html_expand_tabs|).
684When 1 (not recommended), the <pre> tags are omitted, and a plain <div> is
685used instead. Whitespace is replaced by a series of &nbsp; character
686references, and <br> is used to end each line. This is another way to allow
687text in the generated HTML is wrap (see |g:html_pre_wrap|) which also works in
688old browsers, but may cause noticeable differences between Vim's display and
689the rendered page generated by 2html.vim.
690>
691 :let g:html_no_pre = 1
692<
693 *g:html_expand_tabs*
Bram Moolenaarf0d58ef2018-11-16 16:13:44 +0100694Default: 0 if 'tabstop' is 8, 'expandtab' is 0, 'vartabstop' is not in use,
695 and no fold column or line numbers occur in the generated HTML;
696 1 otherwise.
697When 1, <Tab> characters in the buffer text are replaced with an appropriate
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200698number of space characters, or &nbsp; references if |g:html_no_pre| is 1.
Bram Moolenaarf0d58ef2018-11-16 16:13:44 +0100699When 0, if |g:html_no_pre| is 0 or unset, <Tab> characters in the buffer text
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200700are included as-is in the generated HTML. This is useful for when you want to
701allow copy and paste from a browser without losing the actual whitespace in
702the source document. Note that this can easily break text alignment and
703indentation in the HTML, unless set by default.
704
705Force |2html.vim| to keep <Tab> characters: >
706 :let g:html_expand_tabs = 0
707<
708Force tabs to be expanded: >
709 :let g:html_expand_tabs = 1
710<
711 *TOhtml-encoding-detect* *TOhtml-encoding*
712It is highly recommended to set your desired encoding with
713|g:html_use_encoding| for any content which will be placed on a web server.
714
715If you do not specify an encoding, |2html.vim| uses the preferred IANA name
716for the current value of 'fileencoding' if set, or 'encoding' if not.
717'encoding' is always used for certain 'buftype' values. 'fileencoding' will be
718set to match the chosen document encoding.
719
720Automatic detection works for the encodings mentioned specifically by name in
721|encoding-names|, but TOhtml will only automatically use those encodings with
722wide browser support. However, you can override this to support specific
723encodings that may not be automatically detected by default (see options
724below). See http://www.iana.org/assignments/character-sets for the IANA names.
725
726Note, by default all Unicode encodings are converted to UTF-8 with no BOM in
727the generated HTML, as recommended by W3C:
728
729 http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-choosing-encodings
730 http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-byte-order-mark
731
732 *g:html_use_encoding*
733Default: none, uses IANA name for current 'fileencoding' as above.
734To overrule all automatic charset detection, set g:html_use_encoding to the
735name of the charset to be used. It is recommended to set this variable to
736something widely supported, like UTF-8, for anything you will be hosting on a
737webserver: >
738 :let g:html_use_encoding = "UTF-8"
739You can also use this option to omit the line that specifies the charset
740entirely, by setting g:html_use_encoding to an empty string (NOT recommended): >
741 :let g:html_use_encoding = ""
742To go back to the automatic mechanism, delete the |g:html_use_encoding|
743variable: >
744 :unlet g:html_use_encoding
745<
746 *g:html_encoding_override*
747Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings
748 mentioned by name at |encoding-names|.
749This option allows |2html.vim| to detect the correct 'fileencoding' when you
750specify an encoding with |g:html_use_encoding| which is not in the default
751list of conversions.
752
753This is a dictionary of charset-encoding pairs that will replace existing
754pairs automatically detected by TOhtml, or supplement with new pairs.
755
756Detect the HTML charset "windows-1252" as the encoding "8bit-cp1252": >
757 :let g:html_encoding_override = {'windows-1252': '8bit-cp1252'}
758<
759 *g:html_charset_override*
760Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings
761 mentioned by name at |encoding-names| and which have wide
762 browser support.
763This option allows |2html.vim| to detect the HTML charset for any
764'fileencoding' or 'encoding' which is not detected automatically. You can also
765use it to override specific existing encoding-charset pairs. For example,
766TOhtml will by default use UTF-8 for all Unicode/UCS encodings. To use UTF-16
767and UTF-32 instead, use: >
768 :let g:html_charset_override = {'ucs-4': 'UTF-32', 'utf-16': 'UTF-16'}
769
770Note that documents encoded in either UTF-32 or UTF-16 have known
771compatibility problems with some major browsers.
772
Bram Moolenaar60cce2f2015-10-13 23:21:27 +0200773 *g:html_font*
774Default: "monospace"
775You can specify the font or fonts used in the converted document using
776g:html_font. If this option is set to a string, then the value will be
777surrounded with single quotes. If this option is set to a list then each list
778item is surrounded by single quotes and the list is joined with commas. Either
779way, "monospace" is added as the fallback generic family name and the entire
780result used as the font family (using CSS) or font face (if not using CSS).
781Examples: >
782
783 " font-family: 'Consolas', monospace;
784 :let g:html_font = "Consolas"
785
786 " font-family: 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Consolas', monospace;
787 :let g:html_font = ["DejaVu Sans Mono", "Consolas"]
788<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200789 *convert-to-XML* *convert-to-XHTML* *g:html_use_xhtml*
790Default: 0.
791When 0, generate standard HTML 4.01 (strict when possible).
792When 1, generate XHTML 1.0 instead (XML compliant HTML).
793>
794 :let g:html_use_xhtml = 1
795<
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100796==============================================================================
7975. Syntax file remarks *:syn-file-remarks*
798
799 *b:current_syntax-variable*
800Vim stores the name of the syntax that has been loaded in the
801"b:current_syntax" variable. You can use this if you want to load other
802settings, depending on which syntax is active. Example: >
803 :au BufReadPost * if b:current_syntax == "csh"
804 :au BufReadPost * do-some-things
805 :au BufReadPost * endif
806
807
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000808
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000809ABEL *abel.vim* *ft-abel-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000810
811ABEL highlighting provides some user-defined options. To enable them, assign
812any value to the respective variable. Example: >
813 :let abel_obsolete_ok=1
814To disable them use ":unlet". Example: >
815 :unlet abel_obsolete_ok
816
817Variable Highlight ~
818abel_obsolete_ok obsolete keywords are statements, not errors
819abel_cpp_comments_illegal do not interpret '//' as inline comment leader
820
821
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000822ADA
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000823
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000824See |ft-ada-syntax|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000825
826
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000827ANT *ant.vim* *ft-ant-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000828
829The ant syntax file provides syntax highlighting for javascript and python
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000830by default. Syntax highlighting for other script languages can be installed
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000831by the function AntSyntaxScript(), which takes the tag name as first argument
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000832and the script syntax file name as second argument. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000833
834 :call AntSyntaxScript('perl', 'perl.vim')
835
836will install syntax perl highlighting for the following ant code >
837
838 <script language = 'perl'><![CDATA[
839 # everything inside is highlighted as perl
840 ]]></script>
841
842See |mysyntaxfile-add| for installing script languages permanently.
843
844
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000845APACHE *apache.vim* *ft-apache-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000846
Bram Moolenaar01164a62017-11-02 22:58:42 +0100847The apache syntax file provides syntax highlighting for Apache HTTP server
848version 2.2.3.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000849
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000850
851 *asm.vim* *asmh8300.vim* *nasm.vim* *masm.vim* *asm68k*
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000852ASSEMBLY *ft-asm-syntax* *ft-asmh8300-syntax* *ft-nasm-syntax*
853 *ft-masm-syntax* *ft-asm68k-syntax* *fasm.vim*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000854
855Files matching "*.i" could be Progress or Assembly. If the automatic detection
856doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your
857startup vimrc: >
858 :let filetype_i = "asm"
859Replace "asm" with the type of assembly you use.
860
861There are many types of assembly languages that all use the same file name
862extensions. Therefore you will have to select the type yourself, or add a
863line in the assembly file that Vim will recognize. Currently these syntax
864files are included:
865 asm GNU assembly (the default)
866 asm68k Motorola 680x0 assembly
867 asmh8300 Hitachi H-8300 version of GNU assembly
868 ia64 Intel Itanium 64
869 fasm Flat assembly (http://flatassembler.net)
870 masm Microsoft assembly (probably works for any 80x86)
871 nasm Netwide assembly
872 tasm Turbo Assembly (with opcodes 80x86 up to Pentium, and
873 MMX)
874 pic PIC assembly (currently for PIC16F84)
875
876The most flexible is to add a line in your assembly file containing: >
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100877 asmsyntax=nasm
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000878Replace "nasm" with the name of the real assembly syntax. This line must be
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100879one of the first five lines in the file. No non-white text must be
Bram Moolenaar30b65812012-07-12 22:01:11 +0200880immediately before or after this text. Note that specifying asmsyntax=foo is
881equivalent to setting ft=foo in a |modeline|, and that in case of a conflict
882between the two settings the one from the modeline will take precedence (in
883particular, if you have ft=asm in the modeline, you will get the GNU syntax
884highlighting regardless of what is specified as asmsyntax).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000885
886The syntax type can always be overruled for a specific buffer by setting the
887b:asmsyntax variable: >
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000888 :let b:asmsyntax = "nasm"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000889
890If b:asmsyntax is not set, either automatically or by hand, then the value of
891the global variable asmsyntax is used. This can be seen as a default assembly
892language: >
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000893 :let asmsyntax = "nasm"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000894
895As a last resort, if nothing is defined, the "asm" syntax is used.
896
897
898Netwide assembler (nasm.vim) optional highlighting ~
899
900To enable a feature: >
901 :let {variable}=1|set syntax=nasm
902To disable a feature: >
903 :unlet {variable} |set syntax=nasm
904
905Variable Highlight ~
906nasm_loose_syntax unofficial parser allowed syntax not as Error
907 (parser dependent; not recommended)
908nasm_ctx_outside_macro contexts outside macro not as Error
909nasm_no_warn potentially risky syntax not as ToDo
910
911
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000912ASPPERL and ASPVBS *ft-aspperl-syntax* *ft-aspvbs-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000913
914*.asp and *.asa files could be either Perl or Visual Basic script. Since it's
915hard to detect this you can set two global variables to tell Vim what you are
916using. For Perl script use: >
917 :let g:filetype_asa = "aspperl"
918 :let g:filetype_asp = "aspperl"
919For Visual Basic use: >
920 :let g:filetype_asa = "aspvbs"
921 :let g:filetype_asp = "aspvbs"
922
923
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000924BAAN *baan.vim* *baan-syntax*
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000925
Bram Moolenaar53f7fcc2021-07-28 20:10:16 +0200926The baan.vim gives syntax support for BaanC of release BaanIV up to SSA ERP LN
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000927for both 3 GL and 4 GL programming. Large number of standard defines/constants
928are supported.
929
930Some special violation of coding standards will be signalled when one specify
931in ones |.vimrc|: >
932 let baan_code_stds=1
933
934*baan-folding*
935
936Syntax folding can be enabled at various levels through the variables
937mentioned below (Set those in your |.vimrc|). The more complex folding on
938source blocks and SQL can be CPU intensive.
939
940To allow any folding and enable folding at function level use: >
941 let baan_fold=1
942Folding can be enabled at source block level as if, while, for ,... The
943indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to match (spaces are not
944considered equal to a tab). >
945 let baan_fold_block=1
946Folding can be enabled for embedded SQL blocks as SELECT, SELECTDO,
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000947SELECTEMPTY, ... The indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000948match (spaces are not considered equal to a tab). >
949 let baan_fold_sql=1
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000950Note: Block folding can result in many small folds. It is suggested to |:set|
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000951the options 'foldminlines' and 'foldnestmax' in |.vimrc| or use |:setlocal| in
952.../after/syntax/baan.vim (see |after-directory|). Eg: >
953 set foldminlines=5
954 set foldnestmax=6
955
956
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000957BASIC *basic.vim* *vb.vim* *ft-basic-syntax* *ft-vb-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000958
959Both Visual Basic and "normal" basic use the extension ".bas". To detect
960which one should be used, Vim checks for the string "VB_Name" in the first
961five lines of the file. If it is not found, filetype will be "basic",
962otherwise "vb". Files with the ".frm" extension will always be seen as Visual
963Basic.
964
965
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000966C *c.vim* *ft-c-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000967
968A few things in C highlighting are optional. To enable them assign any value
Bram Moolenaar91359012019-11-30 17:57:03 +0100969(including zero) to the respective variable. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000970 :let c_comment_strings = 1
Bram Moolenaar91359012019-11-30 17:57:03 +0100971 :let c_no_bracket_error = 0
972To disable them use `:unlet`. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000973 :unlet c_comment_strings
Bram Moolenaar91359012019-11-30 17:57:03 +0100974Setting the value to zero doesn't work!
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000975
Bram Moolenaarba3ff532018-11-04 14:45:49 +0100976An alternative is to switch to the C++ highlighting: >
977 :set filetype=cpp
978
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000979Variable Highlight ~
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200980*c_gnu* GNU gcc specific items
981*c_comment_strings* strings and numbers inside a comment
982*c_space_errors* trailing white space and spaces before a <Tab>
983*c_no_trail_space_error* ... but no trailing spaces
984*c_no_tab_space_error* ... but no spaces before a <Tab>
985*c_no_bracket_error* don't highlight {}; inside [] as errors
986*c_no_curly_error* don't highlight {}; inside [] and () as errors;
Bram Moolenaar677ee682005-01-27 14:41:15 +0000987 except { and } in first column
Bram Moolenaar09521312016-08-12 22:54:35 +0200988 Default is to highlight them, otherwise you
989 can't spot a missing ")".
Bram Moolenaar91359012019-11-30 17:57:03 +0100990*c_curly_error* highlight a missing } by finding all pairs; this
991 forces syncing from the start of the file, can be slow
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200992*c_no_ansi* don't do standard ANSI types and constants
993*c_ansi_typedefs* ... but do standard ANSI types
994*c_ansi_constants* ... but do standard ANSI constants
995*c_no_utf* don't highlight \u and \U in strings
996*c_syntax_for_h* for *.h files use C syntax instead of C++ and use objc
Bram Moolenaar61d35bd2012-03-28 20:51:51 +0200997 syntax instead of objcpp
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200998*c_no_if0* don't highlight "#if 0" blocks as comments
999*c_no_cformat* don't highlight %-formats in strings
1000*c_no_c99* don't highlight C99 standard items
1001*c_no_c11* don't highlight C11 standard items
1002*c_no_bsd* don't highlight BSD specific types
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001003
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00001004When 'foldmethod' is set to "syntax" then /* */ comments and { } blocks will
1005become a fold. If you don't want comments to become a fold use: >
1006 :let c_no_comment_fold = 1
Bram Moolenaarf9393ef2006-04-24 19:47:27 +00001007"#if 0" blocks are also folded, unless: >
1008 :let c_no_if0_fold = 1
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00001009
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001010If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
1011when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "c_minlines" internal variable
1012to a larger number: >
1013 :let c_minlines = 100
1014This will make the syntax synchronization start 100 lines before the first
1015displayed line. The default value is 50 (15 when c_no_if0 is set). The
1016disadvantage of using a larger number is that redrawing can become slow.
1017
1018When using the "#if 0" / "#endif" comment highlighting, notice that this only
1019works when the "#if 0" is within "c_minlines" from the top of the window. If
1020you have a long "#if 0" construct it will not be highlighted correctly.
1021
1022To match extra items in comments, use the cCommentGroup cluster.
1023Example: >
1024 :au Syntax c call MyCadd()
1025 :function MyCadd()
1026 : syn keyword cMyItem contained Ni
1027 : syn cluster cCommentGroup add=cMyItem
1028 : hi link cMyItem Title
1029 :endfun
1030
1031ANSI constants will be highlighted with the "cConstant" group. This includes
1032"NULL", "SIG_IGN" and others. But not "TRUE", for example, because this is
1033not in the ANSI standard. If you find this confusing, remove the cConstant
1034highlighting: >
1035 :hi link cConstant NONE
1036
1037If you see '{' and '}' highlighted as an error where they are OK, reset the
1038highlighting for cErrInParen and cErrInBracket.
1039
1040If you want to use folding in your C files, you can add these lines in a file
Bram Moolenaar06b5d512010-05-22 15:37:44 +02001041in the "after" directory in 'runtimepath'. For Unix this would be
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001042~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim. >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001043 syn sync fromstart
1044 set foldmethod=syntax
1045
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001046CH *ch.vim* *ft-ch-syntax*
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00001047
1048C/C++ interpreter. Ch has similar syntax highlighting to C and builds upon
1049the C syntax file. See |c.vim| for all the settings that are available for C.
1050
1051By setting a variable you can tell Vim to use Ch syntax for *.h files, instead
1052of C or C++: >
1053 :let ch_syntax_for_h = 1
1054
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001055
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001056CHILL *chill.vim* *ft-chill-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001057
1058Chill syntax highlighting is similar to C. See |c.vim| for all the settings
1059that are available. Additionally there is:
1060
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001061chill_space_errors like c_space_errors
1062chill_comment_string like c_comment_strings
1063chill_minlines like c_minlines
1064
1065
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001066CHANGELOG *changelog.vim* *ft-changelog-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001067
1068ChangeLog supports highlighting spaces at the start of a line.
1069If you do not like this, add following line to your .vimrc: >
1070 let g:changelog_spacing_errors = 0
1071This works the next time you edit a changelog file. You can also use
1072"b:changelog_spacing_errors" to set this per buffer (before loading the syntax
1073file).
1074
1075You can change the highlighting used, e.g., to flag the spaces as an error: >
1076 :hi link ChangelogError Error
1077Or to avoid the highlighting: >
1078 :hi link ChangelogError NONE
1079This works immediately.
1080
1081
Bram Moolenaar76f3b1a2014-03-27 22:30:07 +01001082CLOJURE *ft-clojure-syntax*
1083
Bram Moolenaar113cb512021-11-07 20:27:04 +00001084 *g:clojure_syntax_keywords*
1085
1086Syntax highlighting of public vars in "clojure.core" is provided by default,
1087but additional symbols can be highlighted by adding them to the
1088|g:clojure_syntax_keywords| variable. The value should be a |Dictionary| of
1089syntax group names, each containing a |List| of identifiers.
Bram Moolenaar6f1d9a02016-07-24 14:12:38 +02001090>
1091 let g:clojure_syntax_keywords = {
Bram Moolenaar113cb512021-11-07 20:27:04 +00001092 \ 'clojureMacro': ["defproject", "defcustom"],
1093 \ 'clojureFunc': ["string/join", "string/replace"]
Bram Moolenaar6f1d9a02016-07-24 14:12:38 +02001094 \ }
1095<
1096Refer to the Clojure syntax script for valid syntax group names.
1097
Bram Moolenaar113cb512021-11-07 20:27:04 +00001098There is also *b:clojure_syntax_keywords* which is a buffer-local variant of
1099this variable intended for use by plugin authors to highlight symbols
1100dynamically.
Bram Moolenaar6f1d9a02016-07-24 14:12:38 +02001101
Bram Moolenaar113cb512021-11-07 20:27:04 +00001102By setting the *b:clojure_syntax_without_core_keywords* variable, vars from
1103"clojure.core" will not be highlighted by default. This is useful for
1104namespaces that have set `(:refer-clojure :only [])`
Bram Moolenaar76f3b1a2014-03-27 22:30:07 +01001105
Bram Moolenaar76f3b1a2014-03-27 22:30:07 +01001106
Bram Moolenaar113cb512021-11-07 20:27:04 +00001107 *g:clojure_fold*
1108
1109Setting |g:clojure_fold| to `1` will enable the folding of Clojure code. Any
1110list, vector or map that extends over more than one line can be folded using
1111the standard Vim |fold-commands|.
1112
1113
1114 *g:clojure_discard_macro*
1115
1116Set this variable to `1` to enable basic highlighting of Clojure's "discard
1117reader macro".
Bram Moolenaar76f3b1a2014-03-27 22:30:07 +01001118>
Bram Moolenaar113cb512021-11-07 20:27:04 +00001119 #_(defn foo [x]
1120 (println x))
Bram Moolenaar76f3b1a2014-03-27 22:30:07 +01001121<
Bram Moolenaar113cb512021-11-07 20:27:04 +00001122Note that this option will not correctly highlight stacked discard macros
1123(e.g. `#_#_`).
1124
Bram Moolenaar76f3b1a2014-03-27 22:30:07 +01001125
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001126COBOL *cobol.vim* *ft-cobol-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001127
1128COBOL highlighting has different needs for legacy code than it does for fresh
1129development. This is due to differences in what is being done (maintenance
1130versus development) and other factors. To enable legacy code highlighting,
1131add this line to your .vimrc: >
1132 :let cobol_legacy_code = 1
1133To disable it again, use this: >
1134 :unlet cobol_legacy_code
1135
1136
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001137COLD FUSION *coldfusion.vim* *ft-coldfusion-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001138
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001139The ColdFusion has its own version of HTML comments. To turn on ColdFusion
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001140comment highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >
1141
1142 :let html_wrong_comments = 1
1143
1144The ColdFusion syntax file is based on the HTML syntax file.
1145
1146
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01001147CPP *cpp.vim* *ft-cpp-syntax*
1148
Bram Moolenaar89a9c152021-08-29 21:55:35 +02001149Most things are the same as |ft-c-syntax|.
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01001150
1151Variable Highlight ~
Bram Moolenaara0f849e2015-10-30 14:37:44 +01001152cpp_no_cpp11 don't highlight C++11 standard items
Bram Moolenaarb4ff5182015-11-10 21:15:48 +01001153cpp_no_cpp14 don't highlight C++14 standard items
Bram Moolenaar89a9c152021-08-29 21:55:35 +02001154cpp_no_cpp17 don't highlight C++17 standard items
1155cpp_no_cpp20 don't highlight C++20 standard items
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01001156
1157
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001158CSH *csh.vim* *ft-csh-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001159
1160This covers the shell named "csh". Note that on some systems tcsh is actually
1161used.
1162
1163Detecting whether a file is csh or tcsh is notoriously hard. Some systems
1164symlink /bin/csh to /bin/tcsh, making it almost impossible to distinguish
1165between csh and tcsh. In case VIM guesses wrong you can set the
Bram Moolenaar97293012011-07-18 19:40:27 +02001166"filetype_csh" variable. For using csh: *g:filetype_csh*
1167>
1168 :let g:filetype_csh = "csh"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001169
1170For using tcsh: >
1171
Bram Moolenaar97293012011-07-18 19:40:27 +02001172 :let g:filetype_csh = "tcsh"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001173
1174Any script with a tcsh extension or a standard tcsh filename (.tcshrc,
1175tcsh.tcshrc, tcsh.login) will have filetype tcsh. All other tcsh/csh scripts
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001176will be classified as tcsh, UNLESS the "filetype_csh" variable exists. If the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001177"filetype_csh" variable exists, the filetype will be set to the value of the
1178variable.
1179
1180
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001181CYNLIB *cynlib.vim* *ft-cynlib-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001182
1183Cynlib files are C++ files that use the Cynlib class library to enable
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001184hardware modelling and simulation using C++. Typically Cynlib files have a .cc
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001185or a .cpp extension, which makes it very difficult to distinguish them from a
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001186normal C++ file. Thus, to enable Cynlib highlighting for .cc files, add this
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001187line to your .vimrc file: >
1188
1189 :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cc=1
1190
1191Similarly for cpp files (this extension is only usually used in Windows) >
1192
1193 :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp=1
1194
1195To disable these again, use this: >
1196
1197 :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cc
1198 :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp
1199<
1200
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001201CWEB *cweb.vim* *ft-cweb-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001202
1203Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection
1204doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your
1205startup vimrc: >
1206 :let filetype_w = "cweb"
1207
1208
Bram Moolenaar96f45c02019-10-26 19:53:45 +02001209DART *dart.vim* *ft-dart-syntax*
1210
1211Dart is an object-oriented, typed, class defined, garbage collected language
1212used for developing mobile, desktop, web, and back-end applications. Dart uses
1213a C-like syntax derived from C, Java, and JavaScript, with features adopted
1214from Smalltalk, Python, Ruby, and others.
1215
1216More information about the language and its development environment at the
1217official Dart language website at https://dart.dev
1218
1219dart.vim syntax detects and highlights Dart statements, reserved words,
1220type declarations, storage classes, conditionals, loops, interpolated values,
1221and comments. There is no support idioms from Flutter or any other Dart
1222framework.
1223
1224Changes, fixes? Submit an issue or pull request via:
1225
1226https://github.com/pr3d4t0r/dart-vim-syntax/
1227
1228
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001229DESKTOP *desktop.vim* *ft-desktop-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001230
1231Primary goal of this syntax file is to highlight .desktop and .directory files
Bram Moolenaara17d4c12010-05-30 18:30:36 +02001232according to freedesktop.org standard:
Bram Moolenaar65e0d772020-06-14 17:29:55 +02001233https://specifications.freedesktop.org/desktop-entry-spec/latest/
1234To highlight nonstandard extensions that does not begin with X-, set >
1235 let g:desktop_enable_nonstd = 1
1236Note that this may cause wrong highlight.
1237To highlight KDE-reserved features, set >
1238 let g:desktop_enable_kde = 1
1239g:desktop_enable_kde follows g:desktop_enable_nonstd if not supplied
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001240
1241
Bram Moolenaar8feef4f2015-01-07 16:57:10 +01001242DIFF *diff.vim*
1243
1244The diff highlighting normally finds translated headers. This can be slow if
1245there are very long lines in the file. To disable translations: >
1246
1247 :let diff_translations = 0
1248
Bram Moolenaar0122c402015-02-03 19:13:34 +01001249Also see |diff-slow|.
1250
Bram Moolenaar8feef4f2015-01-07 16:57:10 +01001251
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001252DIRCOLORS *dircolors.vim* *ft-dircolors-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001253
1254The dircolors utility highlighting definition has one option. It exists to
1255provide compatibility with the Slackware GNU/Linux distributions version of
1256the command. It adds a few keywords that are generally ignored by most
1257versions. On Slackware systems, however, the utility accepts the keywords and
1258uses them for processing. To enable the Slackware keywords add the following
1259line to your startup file: >
1260 let dircolors_is_slackware = 1
1261
1262
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001263DOCBOOK *docbk.vim* *ft-docbk-syntax* *docbook*
Bram Moolenaar81af9252010-12-10 20:35:50 +01001264DOCBOOK XML *docbkxml.vim* *ft-docbkxml-syntax*
1265DOCBOOK SGML *docbksgml.vim* *ft-docbksgml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001266
1267There are two types of DocBook files: SGML and XML. To specify what type you
1268are using the "b:docbk_type" variable should be set. Vim does this for you
1269automatically if it can recognize the type. When Vim can't guess it the type
1270defaults to XML.
1271You can set the type manually: >
1272 :let docbk_type = "sgml"
1273or: >
1274 :let docbk_type = "xml"
1275You need to do this before loading the syntax file, which is complicated.
1276Simpler is setting the filetype to "docbkxml" or "docbksgml": >
1277 :set filetype=docbksgml
1278or: >
1279 :set filetype=docbkxml
1280
Bram Moolenaar2df58b42012-11-28 18:21:11 +01001281You can specify the DocBook version: >
1282 :let docbk_ver = 3
1283When not set 4 is used.
1284
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001285
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001286DOSBATCH *dosbatch.vim* *ft-dosbatch-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001287
1288There is one option with highlighting DOS batch files. This covers new
1289extensions to the Command Interpreter introduced with Windows 2000 and
1290is controlled by the variable dosbatch_cmdextversion. For Windows NT
1291this should have the value 1, and for Windows 2000 it should be 2.
1292Select the version you want with the following line: >
1293
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00001294 :let dosbatch_cmdextversion = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001295
1296If this variable is not defined it defaults to a value of 2 to support
1297Windows 2000.
1298
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00001299A second option covers whether *.btm files should be detected as type
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001300"dosbatch" (MS-DOS batch files) or type "btm" (4DOS batch files). The latter
1301is used by default. You may select the former with the following line: >
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00001302
1303 :let g:dosbatch_syntax_for_btm = 1
1304
1305If this variable is undefined or zero, btm syntax is selected.
1306
1307
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001308DOXYGEN *doxygen.vim* *doxygen-syntax*
1309
1310Doxygen generates code documentation using a special documentation format
Bram Moolenaare37d50a2008-08-06 17:06:04 +00001311(similar to Javadoc). This syntax script adds doxygen highlighting to c, cpp,
1312idl and php files, and should also work with java.
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001313
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00001314There are a few of ways to turn on doxygen formatting. It can be done
1315explicitly or in a modeline by appending '.doxygen' to the syntax of the file.
1316Example: >
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001317 :set syntax=c.doxygen
1318or >
1319 // vim:syntax=c.doxygen
1320
Bram Moolenaar5dc62522012-02-13 00:05:22 +01001321It can also be done automatically for C, C++, C#, IDL and PHP files by setting
1322the global or buffer-local variable load_doxygen_syntax. This is done by
1323adding the following to your .vimrc. >
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001324 :let g:load_doxygen_syntax=1
1325
Bram Moolenaar06b5d512010-05-22 15:37:44 +02001326There are a couple of variables that have an effect on syntax highlighting, and
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001327are to do with non-standard highlighting options.
1328
1329Variable Default Effect ~
1330g:doxygen_enhanced_color
1331g:doxygen_enhanced_colour 0 Use non-standard highlighting for
1332 doxygen comments.
1333
1334doxygen_my_rendering 0 Disable rendering of HTML bold, italic
1335 and html_my_rendering underline.
1336
1337doxygen_javadoc_autobrief 1 Set to 0 to disable javadoc autobrief
1338 colour highlighting.
1339
1340doxygen_end_punctuation '[.]' Set to regexp match for the ending
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00001341 punctuation of brief
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001342
Bram Moolenaarfc65cab2018-08-28 22:58:02 +02001343There are also some highlight groups worth mentioning as they can be useful in
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001344configuration.
1345
1346Highlight Effect ~
1347doxygenErrorComment The colour of an end-comment when missing
1348 punctuation in a code, verbatim or dot section
1349doxygenLinkError The colour of an end-comment when missing the
1350 \endlink from a \link section.
1351
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001352
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001353DTD *dtd.vim* *ft-dtd-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001354
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001355The DTD syntax highlighting is case sensitive by default. To disable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001356case-sensitive highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >
1357
1358 :let dtd_ignore_case=1
1359
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001360The DTD syntax file will highlight unknown tags as errors. If
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001361this is annoying, it can be turned off by setting: >
1362
1363 :let dtd_no_tag_errors=1
1364
1365before sourcing the dtd.vim syntax file.
1366Parameter entity names are highlighted in the definition using the
1367'Type' highlighting group and 'Comment' for punctuation and '%'.
1368Parameter entity instances are highlighted using the 'Constant'
1369highlighting group and the 'Type' highlighting group for the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001370delimiters % and ;. This can be turned off by setting: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001371
1372 :let dtd_no_param_entities=1
1373
1374The DTD syntax file is also included by xml.vim to highlight included dtd's.
1375
1376
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001377EIFFEL *eiffel.vim* *ft-eiffel-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001378
1379While Eiffel is not case-sensitive, its style guidelines are, and the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001380syntax highlighting file encourages their use. This also allows to
1381highlight class names differently. If you want to disable case-sensitive
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001382highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >
1383
1384 :let eiffel_ignore_case=1
1385
1386Case still matters for class names and TODO marks in comments.
1387
1388Conversely, for even stricter checks, add one of the following lines: >
1389
1390 :let eiffel_strict=1
1391 :let eiffel_pedantic=1
1392
1393Setting eiffel_strict will only catch improper capitalization for the
1394five predefined words "Current", "Void", "Result", "Precursor", and
1395"NONE", to warn against their accidental use as feature or class names.
1396
1397Setting eiffel_pedantic will enforce adherence to the Eiffel style
1398guidelines fairly rigorously (like arbitrary mixes of upper- and
1399lowercase letters as well as outdated ways to capitalize keywords).
1400
1401If you want to use the lower-case version of "Current", "Void",
1402"Result", and "Precursor", you can use >
1403
1404 :let eiffel_lower_case_predef=1
1405
1406instead of completely turning case-sensitive highlighting off.
1407
1408Support for ISE's proposed new creation syntax that is already
1409experimentally handled by some compilers can be enabled by: >
1410
1411 :let eiffel_ise=1
1412
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001413Finally, some vendors support hexadecimal constants. To handle them, add >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001414
1415 :let eiffel_hex_constants=1
1416
1417to your startup file.
1418
1419
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001420EUPHORIA *euphoria3.vim* *euphoria4.vim* *ft-euphoria-syntax*
1421
Bram Moolenaar7ff78462020-07-10 22:00:53 +02001422Two syntax highlighting files exist for Euphoria. One for Euphoria
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001423version 3.1.1, which is the default syntax highlighting file, and one for
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001424Euphoria version 4.0.5 or later.
1425
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001426Euphoria version 3.1.1 (http://www.rapideuphoria.com/) is still necessary
1427for developing applications for the DOS platform, which Euphoria version 4
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001428(http://www.openeuphoria.org/) does not support.
1429
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001430The following file extensions are auto-detected as Euphoria file type:
1431
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001432 *.e, *.eu, *.ew, *.ex, *.exu, *.exw
1433 *.E, *.EU, *.EW, *.EX, *.EXU, *.EXW
1434
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001435To select syntax highlighting file for Euphoria, as well as for
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001436auto-detecting the *.e and *.E file extensions as Euphoria file type,
1437add the following line to your startup file: >
1438
Bram Moolenaar90df4b92021-07-07 20:26:08 +02001439 :let g:filetype_euphoria = "euphoria3"
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001440
Bram Moolenaar4d8f4762021-06-27 15:18:56 +02001441< or >
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001442
Bram Moolenaar90df4b92021-07-07 20:26:08 +02001443 :let g:filetype_euphoria = "euphoria4"
1444
1445Elixir and Euphoria share the *.ex file extension. If the filetype is
1446specifically set as Euphoria with the g:filetype_euphoria variable, or the
1447file is determined to be Euphoria based on keywords in the file, then the
1448filetype will be set as Euphoria. Otherwise, the filetype will default to
1449Elixir.
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001450
1451
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001452ERLANG *erlang.vim* *ft-erlang-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001453
Bram Moolenaarad3b3662013-05-17 18:14:19 +02001454Erlang is a functional programming language developed by Ericsson. Files with
Bram Moolenaar543b7ef2013-06-01 14:50:56 +02001455the following extensions are recognized as Erlang files: erl, hrl, yaws.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001456
Bram Moolenaarad3b3662013-05-17 18:14:19 +02001457The BIFs (built-in functions) are highlighted by default. To disable this,
1458put the following line in your vimrc: >
1459
1460 :let g:erlang_highlight_bifs = 0
1461
1462To enable highlighting some special atoms, put this in your vimrc: >
1463
1464 :let g:erlang_highlight_special_atoms = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001465
1466
Bram Moolenaar90df4b92021-07-07 20:26:08 +02001467ELIXIR *elixir.vim* *ft-elixir-syntax*
1468
1469Elixir is a dynamic, functional language for building scalable and maintainable
1470applications.
1471
1472The following file extensions are auto-detected as Elixir file types:
1473
1474 *.ex, *.exs, *.eex, *.leex, *.lock
1475
1476Elixir and Euphoria share the *.ex file extension. If the filetype is
1477specifically set as Euphoria with the g:filetype_euphoria variable, or the
1478file is determined to be Euphoria based on keywords in the file, then the
1479filetype will be set as Euphoria. Otherwise, the filetype will default to
1480Elixir.
1481
1482
Bram Moolenaard68071d2006-05-02 22:08:30 +00001483FLEXWIKI *flexwiki.vim* *ft-flexwiki-syntax*
1484
1485FlexWiki is an ASP.NET-based wiki package available at http://www.flexwiki.com
Bram Moolenaar446beb42011-05-10 17:18:44 +02001486NOTE: this site currently doesn't work, on Wikipedia is mentioned that
1487development stopped in 2009.
Bram Moolenaard68071d2006-05-02 22:08:30 +00001488
1489Syntax highlighting is available for the most common elements of FlexWiki
1490syntax. The associated ftplugin script sets some buffer-local options to make
1491editing FlexWiki pages more convenient. FlexWiki considers a newline as the
1492start of a new paragraph, so the ftplugin sets 'tw'=0 (unlimited line length),
1493'wrap' (wrap long lines instead of using horizontal scrolling), 'linebreak'
1494(to wrap at a character in 'breakat' instead of at the last char on screen),
1495and so on. It also includes some keymaps that are disabled by default.
1496
1497If you want to enable the keymaps that make "j" and "k" and the cursor keys
1498move up and down by display lines, add this to your .vimrc: >
1499 :let flexwiki_maps = 1
1500
1501
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001502FORM *form.vim* *ft-form-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001503
1504The coloring scheme for syntax elements in the FORM file uses the default
1505modes Conditional, Number, Statement, Comment, PreProc, Type, and String,
Bram Moolenaardd2a0d82007-05-12 15:07:00 +00001506following the language specifications in 'Symbolic Manipulation with FORM' by
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001507J.A.M. Vermaseren, CAN, Netherlands, 1991.
1508
1509If you want include your own changes to the default colors, you have to
1510redefine the following syntax groups:
1511
1512 - formConditional
1513 - formNumber
1514 - formStatement
1515 - formHeaderStatement
1516 - formComment
1517 - formPreProc
1518 - formDirective
1519 - formType
1520 - formString
1521
1522Note that the form.vim syntax file implements FORM preprocessor commands and
1523directives per default in the same syntax group.
1524
1525A predefined enhanced color mode for FORM is available to distinguish between
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001526header statements and statements in the body of a FORM program. To activate
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001527this mode define the following variable in your vimrc file >
1528
1529 :let form_enhanced_color=1
1530
1531The enhanced mode also takes advantage of additional color features for a dark
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001532gvim display. Here, statements are colored LightYellow instead of Yellow, and
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001533conditionals are LightBlue for better distinction.
1534
1535
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001536FORTRAN *fortran.vim* *ft-fortran-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001537
1538Default highlighting and dialect ~
Bram Moolenaar6ee8d892012-01-10 14:55:01 +01001539Highlighting appropriate for Fortran 2008 is used by default. This choice
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001540should be appropriate for most users most of the time because Fortran 2008 is
1541almost a superset of previous versions (Fortran 2003, 95, 90, and 77).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001542
1543Fortran source code form ~
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001544Fortran code can be in either fixed or free source form. Note that the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001545syntax highlighting will not be correct if the form is incorrectly set.
1546
1547When you create a new fortran file, the syntax script assumes fixed source
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001548form. If you always use free source form, then >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001549 :let fortran_free_source=1
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001550in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command. If you always use fixed source
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001551form, then >
1552 :let fortran_fixed_source=1
1553in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command.
1554
Bram Moolenaar256972a2015-12-29 19:10:25 +01001555If the form of the source code depends, in a non-standard way, upon the file
1556extension, then it is most convenient to set fortran_free_source in a ftplugin
1557file. For more information on ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. Note that this
1558will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command precedes the "syntax
1559on" command in your .vimrc file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001560
1561When you edit an existing fortran file, the syntax script will assume free
1562source form if the fortran_free_source variable has been set, and assumes
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001563fixed source form if the fortran_fixed_source variable has been set. If
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001564neither of these variables have been set, the syntax script attempts to
Bram Moolenaar256972a2015-12-29 19:10:25 +01001565determine which source form has been used by examining the file extension
1566using conventions common to the ifort, gfortran, Cray, NAG, and PathScale
1567compilers (.f, .for, .f77 for fixed-source, .f90, .f95, .f03, .f08 for
1568free-source). If none of this works, then the script examines the first five
1569columns of the first 500 lines of your file. If no signs of free source form
1570are detected, then the file is assumed to be in fixed source form. The
1571algorithm should work in the vast majority of cases. In some cases, such as a
1572file that begins with 500 or more full-line comments, the script may
1573incorrectly decide that the fortran code is in fixed form. If that happens,
1574just add a non-comment statement beginning anywhere in the first five columns
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01001575of the first twenty-five lines, save (:w) and then reload (:e!) the file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001576
1577Tabs in fortran files ~
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001578Tabs are not recognized by the Fortran standards. Tabs are not a good idea in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001579fixed format fortran source code which requires fixed column boundaries.
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001580Therefore, tabs are marked as errors. Nevertheless, some programmers like
1581using tabs. If your fortran files contain tabs, then you should set the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001582variable fortran_have_tabs in your .vimrc with a command such as >
1583 :let fortran_have_tabs=1
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001584placed prior to the :syntax on command. Unfortunately, the use of tabs will
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001585mean that the syntax file will not be able to detect incorrect margins.
1586
1587Syntax folding of fortran files ~
1588If you wish to use foldmethod=syntax, then you must first set the variable
1589fortran_fold with a command such as >
1590 :let fortran_fold=1
1591to instruct the syntax script to define fold regions for program units, that
1592is main programs starting with a program statement, subroutines, function
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001593subprograms, block data subprograms, interface blocks, and modules. If you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001594also set the variable fortran_fold_conditionals with a command such as >
1595 :let fortran_fold_conditionals=1
1596then fold regions will also be defined for do loops, if blocks, and select
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001597case constructs. If you also set the variable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001598fortran_fold_multilinecomments with a command such as >
1599 :let fortran_fold_multilinecomments=1
1600then fold regions will also be defined for three or more consecutive comment
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001601lines. Note that defining fold regions can be slow for large files.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001602
1603If fortran_fold, and possibly fortran_fold_conditionals and/or
1604fortran_fold_multilinecomments, have been set, then vim will fold your file if
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001605you set foldmethod=syntax. Comments or blank lines placed between two program
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001606units are not folded because they are seen as not belonging to any program
1607unit.
1608
1609More precise fortran syntax ~
1610If you set the variable fortran_more_precise with a command such as >
1611 :let fortran_more_precise=1
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001612then the syntax coloring will be more precise but slower. In particular,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001613statement labels used in do, goto and arithmetic if statements will be
1614recognized, as will construct names at the end of a do, if, select or forall
1615construct.
1616
1617Non-default fortran dialects ~
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001618The syntax script supports two Fortran dialects: f08 and F. You will probably
1619find the default highlighting (f08) satisfactory. A few legacy constructs
1620deleted or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard are highlighted as todo
1621items.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001622
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001623If you use F, the advantage of setting the dialect appropriately is that
1624other legacy features excluded from F will be highlighted as todo items and
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001625that free source form will be assumed.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001626
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001627The dialect can be selected in various ways. If all your fortran files use
1628the same dialect, set the global variable fortran_dialect in your .vimrc prior
1629to your syntax on statement. The case-sensitive, permissible values of
1630fortran_dialect are "f08" or "F". Invalid values of fortran_dialect are
1631ignored.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001632
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001633If the dialect depends upon the file extension, then it is most convenient to
1634set a buffer-local variable in a ftplugin file. For more information on
1635ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. For example, if all your fortran files with
1636an .f90 extension are written in the F subset, your ftplugin file should
1637contain the code >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001638 let s:extfname = expand("%:e")
1639 if s:extfname ==? "f90"
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001640 let b:fortran_dialect="F"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001641 else
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001642 unlet! b:fortran_dialect
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001643 endif
1644Note that this will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command
1645precedes the "syntax on" command in your .vimrc file.
1646
1647Finer control is necessary if the file extension does not uniquely identify
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001648the dialect. You can override the default dialect, on a file-by-file basis,
1649by including a comment with the directive "fortran_dialect=xx" (where xx=F or
1650f08) in one of the first three lines in your file. For example, your older .f
1651files may be legacy code but your newer ones may be F codes, and you would
1652identify the latter by including in the first three lines of those files a
1653Fortran comment of the form >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001654 ! fortran_dialect=F
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001655
1656For previous versions of the syntax, you may have set fortran_dialect to the
1657now-obsolete values "f77", "f90", "f95", or "elf". Such settings will be
1658silently handled as "f08". Users of "elf" may wish to experiment with "F"
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001659instead.
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001660
1661The syntax/fortran.vim script contains embedded comments that tell you how to
1662comment and/or uncomment some lines to (a) activate recognition of some
1663non-standard, vendor-supplied intrinsics and (b) to prevent features deleted
1664or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard from being highlighted as todo
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001665items.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001666
1667Limitations ~
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001668Parenthesis checking does not catch too few closing parentheses. Hollerith
1669strings are not recognized. Some keywords may be highlighted incorrectly
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001670because Fortran90 has no reserved words.
1671
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001672For further information related to fortran, see |ft-fortran-indent| and
1673|ft-fortran-plugin|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001674
1675
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001676FVWM CONFIGURATION FILES *fvwm.vim* *ft-fvwm-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001677
1678In order for Vim to recognize Fvwm configuration files that do not match
1679the patterns *fvwmrc* or *fvwm2rc* , you must put additional patterns
1680appropriate to your system in your myfiletypes.vim file. For these
1681patterns, you must set the variable "b:fvwm_version" to the major version
1682number of Fvwm, and the 'filetype' option to fvwm.
1683
1684For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/X11/fvwm2/
1685as Fvwm2 configuration files, add the following: >
1686
1687 :au! BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/X11/fvwm2/* let b:fvwm_version = 2 |
1688 \ set filetype=fvwm
1689
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001690GSP *gsp.vim* *ft-gsp-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001691
1692The default coloring style for GSP pages is defined by |html.vim|, and
1693the coloring for java code (within java tags or inline between backticks)
1694is defined by |java.vim|. The following HTML groups defined in |html.vim|
1695are redefined to incorporate and highlight inline java code:
1696
1697 htmlString
1698 htmlValue
1699 htmlEndTag
1700 htmlTag
1701 htmlTagN
1702
1703Highlighting should look fine most of the places where you'd see inline
1704java code, but in some special cases it may not. To add another HTML
1705group where you will have inline java code where it does not highlight
1706correctly, just copy the line you want from |html.vim| and add gspJava
1707to the contains clause.
1708
1709The backticks for inline java are highlighted according to the htmlError
1710group to make them easier to see.
1711
1712
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001713GROFF *groff.vim* *ft-groff-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001714
1715The groff syntax file is a wrapper for |nroff.vim|, see the notes
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001716under that heading for examples of use and configuration. The purpose
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001717of this wrapper is to set up groff syntax extensions by setting the
1718filetype from a |modeline| or in a personal filetype definitions file
1719(see |filetype.txt|).
1720
1721
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001722HASKELL *haskell.vim* *lhaskell.vim* *ft-haskell-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001723
1724The Haskell syntax files support plain Haskell code as well as literate
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001725Haskell code, the latter in both Bird style and TeX style. The Haskell
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001726syntax highlighting will also highlight C preprocessor directives.
1727
1728If you want to highlight delimiter characters (useful if you have a
1729light-coloured background), add to your .vimrc: >
1730 :let hs_highlight_delimiters = 1
1731To treat True and False as keywords as opposed to ordinary identifiers,
1732add: >
1733 :let hs_highlight_boolean = 1
1734To also treat the names of primitive types as keywords: >
1735 :let hs_highlight_types = 1
1736And to treat the names of even more relatively common types as keywords: >
1737 :let hs_highlight_more_types = 1
1738If you want to highlight the names of debugging functions, put in
1739your .vimrc: >
1740 :let hs_highlight_debug = 1
1741
1742The Haskell syntax highlighting also highlights C preprocessor
1743directives, and flags lines that start with # but are not valid
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001744directives as erroneous. This interferes with Haskell's syntax for
1745operators, as they may start with #. If you want to highlight those
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001746as operators as opposed to errors, put in your .vimrc: >
1747 :let hs_allow_hash_operator = 1
1748
1749The syntax highlighting for literate Haskell code will try to
1750automatically guess whether your literate Haskell code contains
1751TeX markup or not, and correspondingly highlight TeX constructs
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001752or nothing at all. You can override this globally by putting
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001753in your .vimrc >
1754 :let lhs_markup = none
1755for no highlighting at all, or >
1756 :let lhs_markup = tex
1757to force the highlighting to always try to highlight TeX markup.
1758For more flexibility, you may also use buffer local versions of
1759this variable, so e.g. >
1760 :let b:lhs_markup = tex
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001761will force TeX highlighting for a particular buffer. It has to be
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001762set before turning syntax highlighting on for the buffer or
1763loading a file.
1764
1765
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001766HTML *html.vim* *ft-html-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001767
1768The coloring scheme for tags in the HTML file works as follows.
1769
1770The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag.
1771This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for
Bram Moolenaarc8cdf0f2021-03-13 13:28:13 +01001772closing tags the 'Identifier' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those
1773are defined for you)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001774
1775Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag
1776names are colored with the same color as the <> or </> respectively which
1777makes it easy to spot errors
1778
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001779Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001780names are colored differently than unknown ones.
1781
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001782Some HTML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001783are recognized by the html.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal
1784text is shown: <B> <I> <U> <EM> <STRONG> (<EM> is used as an alias for <I>,
1785while <STRONG> as an alias for <B>), <H1> - <H6>, <HEAD>, <TITLE> and <A>, but
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001786only if used as a link (that is, it must include a href as in
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00001787<A href="somefile.html">).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001788
1789If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the
1790following syntax groups:
1791
1792 - htmlBold
1793 - htmlBoldUnderline
1794 - htmlBoldUnderlineItalic
1795 - htmlUnderline
1796 - htmlUnderlineItalic
1797 - htmlItalic
1798 - htmlTitle for titles
1799 - htmlH1 - htmlH6 for headings
1800
1801To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all with the exception
1802of the last two (htmlTitle and htmlH[1-6], which are optional) and define the
1803following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files
1804are read during initialization) >
1805 :let html_my_rendering=1
1806
1807If you'd like to see an example download mysyntax.vim at
1808http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html
1809
1810You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your
1811vimrc file: >
1812 :let html_no_rendering=1
1813
1814HTML comments are rather special (see an HTML reference document for the
1815details), and the syntax coloring scheme will highlight all errors.
1816However, if you prefer to use the wrong style (starts with <!-- and
Bram Moolenaar8bb1c3e2014-07-04 16:43:17 +02001817ends with -->) you can define >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001818 :let html_wrong_comments=1
1819
1820JavaScript and Visual Basic embedded inside HTML documents are highlighted as
1821'Special' with statements, comments, strings and so on colored as in standard
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001822programming languages. Note that only JavaScript and Visual Basic are currently
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001823supported, no other scripting language has been added yet.
1824
1825Embedded and inlined cascading style sheets (CSS) are highlighted too.
1826
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001827There are several html preprocessor languages out there. html.vim has been
1828written such that it should be trivial to include it. To do so add the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001829following two lines to the syntax coloring file for that language
1830(the example comes from the asp.vim file):
Bram Moolenaar30e9b3c2019-09-07 16:24:12 +02001831>
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001832 runtime! syntax/html.vim
1833 syn cluster htmlPreproc add=asp
1834
1835Now you just need to make sure that you add all regions that contain
1836the preprocessor language to the cluster htmlPreproc.
1837
1838
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001839HTML/OS (by Aestiva) *htmlos.vim* *ft-htmlos-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001840
1841The coloring scheme for HTML/OS works as follows:
1842
1843Functions and variable names are the same color by default, because VIM
1844doesn't specify different colors for Functions and Identifiers. To change
1845this (which is recommended if you want function names to be recognizable in a
1846different color) you need to add the following line to either your ~/.vimrc: >
1847 :hi Function term=underline cterm=bold ctermfg=LightGray
1848
1849Of course, the ctermfg can be a different color if you choose.
1850
1851Another issues that HTML/OS runs into is that there is no special filetype to
1852signify that it is a file with HTML/OS coding. You can change this by opening
1853a file and turning on HTML/OS syntax by doing the following: >
1854 :set syntax=htmlos
1855
1856Lastly, it should be noted that the opening and closing characters to begin a
1857block of HTML/OS code can either be << or [[ and >> or ]], respectively.
1858
1859
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001860IA64 *ia64.vim* *intel-itanium* *ft-ia64-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001861
1862Highlighting for the Intel Itanium 64 assembly language. See |asm.vim| for
1863how to recognize this filetype.
1864
1865To have *.inc files be recognized as IA64, add this to your .vimrc file: >
1866 :let g:filetype_inc = "ia64"
1867
1868
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001869INFORM *inform.vim* *ft-inform-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001870
1871Inform highlighting includes symbols provided by the Inform Library, as
1872most programs make extensive use of it. If do not wish Library symbols
1873to be highlighted add this to your vim startup: >
1874 :let inform_highlight_simple=1
1875
1876By default it is assumed that Inform programs are Z-machine targeted,
1877and highlights Z-machine assembly language symbols appropriately. If
1878you intend your program to be targeted to a Glulx/Glk environment you
1879need to add this to your startup sequence: >
1880 :let inform_highlight_glulx=1
1881
1882This will highlight Glulx opcodes instead, and also adds glk() to the
1883set of highlighted system functions.
1884
1885The Inform compiler will flag certain obsolete keywords as errors when
1886it encounters them. These keywords are normally highlighted as errors
1887by Vim. To prevent such error highlighting, you must add this to your
1888startup sequence: >
1889 :let inform_suppress_obsolete=1
1890
1891By default, the language features highlighted conform to Compiler
1892version 6.30 and Library version 6.11. If you are using an older
1893Inform development environment, you may with to add this to your
1894startup sequence: >
1895 :let inform_highlight_old=1
1896
Bram Moolenaar9e54a0e2006-04-14 20:42:25 +00001897IDL *idl.vim* *idl-syntax*
1898
1899IDL (Interface Definition Language) files are used to define RPC calls. In
1900Microsoft land, this is also used for defining COM interfaces and calls.
1901
1902IDL's structure is simple enough to permit a full grammar based approach to
1903rather than using a few heuristics. The result is large and somewhat
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00001904repetitive but seems to work.
Bram Moolenaar9e54a0e2006-04-14 20:42:25 +00001905
1906There are some Microsoft extensions to idl files that are here. Some of them
1907are disabled by defining idl_no_ms_extensions.
1908
1909The more complex of the extensions are disabled by defining idl_no_extensions.
1910
1911Variable Effect ~
1912
1913idl_no_ms_extensions Disable some of the Microsoft specific
1914 extensions
1915idl_no_extensions Disable complex extensions
1916idlsyntax_showerror Show IDL errors (can be rather intrusive, but
1917 quite helpful)
1918idlsyntax_showerror_soft Use softer colours by default for errors
1919
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001920
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001921JAVA *java.vim* *ft-java-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001922
1923The java.vim syntax highlighting file offers several options:
1924
1925In Java 1.0.2 it was never possible to have braces inside parens, so this was
1926flagged as an error. Since Java 1.1 this is possible (with anonymous
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001927classes), and therefore is no longer marked as an error. If you prefer the old
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001928way, put the following line into your vim startup file: >
1929 :let java_mark_braces_in_parens_as_errors=1
1930
1931All identifiers in java.lang.* are always visible in all classes. To
1932highlight them use: >
1933 :let java_highlight_java_lang_ids=1
1934
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001935You can also highlight identifiers of most standard Java packages if you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001936download the javaid.vim script at http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html.
1937If you prefer to only highlight identifiers of a certain package, say java.io
1938use the following: >
1939 :let java_highlight_java_io=1
1940Check the javaid.vim file for a list of all the packages that are supported.
1941
1942Function names are not highlighted, as the way to find functions depends on
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001943how you write Java code. The syntax file knows two possible ways to highlight
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001944functions:
1945
1946If you write function declarations that are always indented by either
1947a tab, 8 spaces or 2 spaces you may want to set >
1948 :let java_highlight_functions="indent"
1949However, if you follow the Java guidelines about how functions and classes are
1950supposed to be named (with respect to upper and lowercase), use >
1951 :let java_highlight_functions="style"
1952If both options do not work for you, but you would still want function
1953declarations to be highlighted create your own definitions by changing the
1954definitions in java.vim or by creating your own java.vim which includes the
1955original one and then adds the code to highlight functions.
1956
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001957In Java 1.1 the functions System.out.println() and System.err.println() should
Bram Moolenaared203462004-06-16 11:19:22 +00001958only be used for debugging. Therefore it is possible to highlight debugging
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001959statements differently. To do this you must add the following definition in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001960your startup file: >
1961 :let java_highlight_debug=1
1962The result will be that those statements are highlighted as 'Special'
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001963characters. If you prefer to have them highlighted differently you must define
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001964new highlightings for the following groups.:
1965 Debug, DebugSpecial, DebugString, DebugBoolean, DebugType
1966which are used for the statement itself, special characters used in debug
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001967strings, strings, boolean constants and types (this, super) respectively. I
Bram Moolenaar2547aa92020-07-26 17:00:44 +02001968have opted to choose another background for those statements.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001969
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001970Javadoc is a program that takes special comments out of Java program files and
1971creates HTML pages. The standard configuration will highlight this HTML code
1972similarly to HTML files (see |html.vim|). You can even add Javascript
1973and CSS inside this code (see below). There are four differences however:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001974 1. The title (all characters up to the first '.' which is followed by
1975 some white space or up to the first '@') is colored differently (to change
1976 the color change the group CommentTitle).
1977 2. The text is colored as 'Comment'.
1978 3. HTML comments are colored as 'Special'
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001979 4. The special Javadoc tags (@see, @param, ...) are highlighted as specials
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001980 and the argument (for @see, @param, @exception) as Function.
1981To turn this feature off add the following line to your startup file: >
1982 :let java_ignore_javadoc=1
1983
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001984If you use the special Javadoc comment highlighting described above you
1985can also turn on special highlighting for Javascript, visual basic
1986scripts and embedded CSS (stylesheets). This makes only sense if you
1987actually have Javadoc comments that include either Javascript or embedded
1988CSS. The options to use are >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001989 :let java_javascript=1
1990 :let java_css=1
1991 :let java_vb=1
1992
1993In order to highlight nested parens with different colors define colors
1994for javaParen, javaParen1 and javaParen2, for example with >
1995 :hi link javaParen Comment
1996or >
1997 :hi javaParen ctermfg=blue guifg=#0000ff
1998
1999If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
2000when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "java_minlines" internal variable
2001to a larger number: >
2002 :let java_minlines = 50
2003This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first
2004displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger
2005number is that redrawing can become slow.
2006
2007
Bram Moolenaar589edb32019-09-20 14:38:13 +02002008JSON *json.vim* *ft-json-syntax*
2009
2010The json syntax file provides syntax highlighting with conceal support by
2011default. To disable concealment: >
2012 let g:vim_json_conceal = 0
2013
2014To disable syntax highlighting of errors: >
2015 let g:vim_json_warnings = 0
2016
2017
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002018LACE *lace.vim* *ft-lace-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002019
2020Lace (Language for Assembly of Classes in Eiffel) is case insensitive, but the
2021style guide lines are not. If you prefer case insensitive highlighting, just
2022define the vim variable 'lace_case_insensitive' in your startup file: >
2023 :let lace_case_insensitive=1
2024
2025
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002026LEX *lex.vim* *ft-lex-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002027
2028Lex uses brute-force synchronizing as the "^%%$" section delimiter
2029gives no clue as to what section follows. Consequently, the value for >
2030 :syn sync minlines=300
2031may be changed by the user if s/he is experiencing synchronization
2032difficulties (such as may happen with large lex files).
2033
2034
Bram Moolenaar6fc45b52010-07-25 17:42:45 +02002035LIFELINES *lifelines.vim* *ft-lifelines-syntax*
2036
2037To highlight deprecated functions as errors, add in your .vimrc: >
2038
2039 :let g:lifelines_deprecated = 1
2040<
2041
Bram Moolenaara5fac542005-10-12 20:58:49 +00002042LISP *lisp.vim* *ft-lisp-syntax*
2043
2044The lisp syntax highlighting provides two options: >
2045
2046 g:lisp_instring : if it exists, then "(...)" strings are highlighted
2047 as if the contents of the string were lisp.
2048 Useful for AutoLisp.
2049 g:lisp_rainbow : if it exists and is nonzero, then differing levels
2050 of parenthesization will receive different
2051 highlighting.
2052<
2053The g:lisp_rainbow option provides 10 levels of individual colorization for
2054the parentheses and backquoted parentheses. Because of the quantity of
2055colorization levels, unlike non-rainbow highlighting, the rainbow mode
2056specifies its highlighting using ctermfg and guifg, thereby bypassing the
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02002057usual color scheme control using standard highlighting groups. The actual
Bram Moolenaara5fac542005-10-12 20:58:49 +00002058highlighting used depends on the dark/bright setting (see |'bg'|).
2059
2060
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002061LITE *lite.vim* *ft-lite-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002062
2063There are two options for the lite syntax highlighting.
2064
2065If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >
2066
2067 :let lite_sql_query = 1
2068
2069For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
2070set "lite_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
2071
2072 :let lite_minlines = 200
2073
2074
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002075LPC *lpc.vim* *ft-lpc-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002076
Bram Moolenaard2f3a8b2018-06-19 14:35:59 +02002077LPC stands for a simple, memory-efficient language: Lars Pensjö C. The
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002078file name of LPC is usually *.c. Recognizing these files as LPC would bother
2079users writing only C programs. If you want to use LPC syntax in Vim, you
2080should set a variable in your .vimrc file: >
2081
2082 :let lpc_syntax_for_c = 1
2083
2084If it doesn't work properly for some particular C or LPC files, use a
2085modeline. For a LPC file:
2086
2087 // vim:set ft=lpc:
2088
2089For a C file that is recognized as LPC:
2090
2091 // vim:set ft=c:
2092
2093If you don't want to set the variable, use the modeline in EVERY LPC file.
2094
2095There are several implementations for LPC, we intend to support most widely
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002096used ones. Here the default LPC syntax is for MudOS series, for MudOS v22
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002097and before, you should turn off the sensible modifiers, and this will also
Bram Moolenaar7e38ea22014-04-05 22:55:53 +02002098assert the new efuns after v22 to be invalid, don't set this variable when
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002099you are using the latest version of MudOS: >
2100
2101 :let lpc_pre_v22 = 1
2102
2103For LpMud 3.2 series of LPC: >
2104
2105 :let lpc_compat_32 = 1
2106
2107For LPC4 series of LPC: >
2108
2109 :let lpc_use_lpc4_syntax = 1
2110
2111For uLPC series of LPC:
2112uLPC has been developed to Pike, so you should use Pike syntax
2113instead, and the name of your source file should be *.pike
2114
2115
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002116LUA *lua.vim* *ft-lua-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002117
Bram Moolenaar5dc62522012-02-13 00:05:22 +01002118The Lua syntax file can be used for versions 4.0, 5.0, 5.1 and 5.2 (5.2 is
Bram Moolenaarfc1421e2006-04-20 22:17:20 +00002119the default). You can select one of these versions using the global variables
2120lua_version and lua_subversion. For example, to activate Lua
Bram Moolenaar5dc62522012-02-13 00:05:22 +010021215.1 syntax highlighting, set the variables like this:
Bram Moolenaarfc1421e2006-04-20 22:17:20 +00002122
2123 :let lua_version = 5
2124 :let lua_subversion = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002125
2126
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002127MAIL *mail.vim* *ft-mail.vim*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002128
2129Vim highlights all the standard elements of an email (headers, signatures,
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002130quoted text and URLs / email addresses). In keeping with standard conventions,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002131signatures begin in a line containing only "--" followed optionally by
2132whitespaces and end with a newline.
2133
2134Vim treats lines beginning with ']', '}', '|', '>' or a word followed by '>'
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002135as quoted text. However Vim highlights headers and signatures in quoted text
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002136only if the text is quoted with '>' (optionally followed by one space).
2137
2138By default mail.vim synchronises syntax to 100 lines before the first
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002139displayed line. If you have a slow machine, and generally deal with emails
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002140with short headers, you can change this to a smaller value: >
2141
2142 :let mail_minlines = 30
2143
2144
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002145MAKE *make.vim* *ft-make-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002146
2147In makefiles, commands are usually highlighted to make it easy for you to spot
2148errors. However, this may be too much coloring for you. You can turn this
2149feature off by using: >
2150
2151 :let make_no_commands = 1
2152
2153
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002154MAPLE *maple.vim* *ft-maple-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002155
2156Maple V, by Waterloo Maple Inc, supports symbolic algebra. The language
2157supports many packages of functions which are selectively loaded by the user.
2158The standard set of packages' functions as supplied in Maple V release 4 may be
2159highlighted at the user's discretion. Users may place in their .vimrc file: >
2160
2161 :let mvpkg_all= 1
2162
2163to get all package functions highlighted, or users may select any subset by
2164choosing a variable/package from the table below and setting that variable to
21651, also in their .vimrc file (prior to sourcing
2166$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim).
2167
2168 Table of Maple V Package Function Selectors >
2169 mv_DEtools mv_genfunc mv_networks mv_process
2170 mv_Galois mv_geometry mv_numapprox mv_simplex
2171 mv_GaussInt mv_grobner mv_numtheory mv_stats
2172 mv_LREtools mv_group mv_orthopoly mv_student
2173 mv_combinat mv_inttrans mv_padic mv_sumtools
2174 mv_combstruct mv_liesymm mv_plots mv_tensor
2175 mv_difforms mv_linalg mv_plottools mv_totorder
2176 mv_finance mv_logic mv_powseries
2177
2178
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002179MATHEMATICA *mma.vim* *ft-mma-syntax* *ft-mathematica-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar34cdc3e2005-05-18 22:24:46 +00002180
2181Empty *.m files will automatically be presumed to be Matlab files unless you
2182have the following in your .vimrc: >
2183
2184 let filetype_m = "mma"
2185
2186
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002187MOO *moo.vim* *ft-moo-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002188
2189If you use C-style comments inside expressions and find it mangles your
2190highlighting, you may want to use extended (slow!) matches for C-style
2191comments: >
2192
2193 :let moo_extended_cstyle_comments = 1
2194
2195To disable highlighting of pronoun substitution patterns inside strings: >
2196
2197 :let moo_no_pronoun_sub = 1
2198
2199To disable highlighting of the regular expression operator '%|', and matching
2200'%(' and '%)' inside strings: >
2201
2202 :let moo_no_regexp = 1
2203
2204Unmatched double quotes can be recognized and highlighted as errors: >
2205
2206 :let moo_unmatched_quotes = 1
2207
2208To highlight builtin properties (.name, .location, .programmer etc.): >
2209
2210 :let moo_builtin_properties = 1
2211
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002212Unknown builtin functions can be recognized and highlighted as errors. If you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002213use this option, add your own extensions to the mooKnownBuiltinFunction group.
2214To enable this option: >
2215
2216 :let moo_unknown_builtin_functions = 1
2217
2218An example of adding sprintf() to the list of known builtin functions: >
2219
2220 :syn keyword mooKnownBuiltinFunction sprintf contained
2221
2222
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002223MSQL *msql.vim* *ft-msql-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002224
2225There are two options for the msql syntax highlighting.
2226
2227If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >
2228
2229 :let msql_sql_query = 1
2230
2231For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
2232set "msql_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
2233
2234 :let msql_minlines = 200
2235
2236
Bram Moolenaarc572da52017-08-27 16:52:01 +02002237N1QL *n1ql.vim* *ft-n1ql-syntax*
2238
2239N1QL is a SQL-like declarative language for manipulating JSON documents in
2240Couchbase Server databases.
2241
2242Vim syntax highlights N1QL statements, keywords, operators, types, comments,
2243and special values. Vim ignores syntactical elements specific to SQL or its
2244many dialects, like COLUMN or CHAR, that don't exist in N1QL.
2245
2246
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002247NCF *ncf.vim* *ft-ncf-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002248
2249There is one option for NCF syntax highlighting.
2250
2251If you want to have unrecognized (by ncf.vim) statements highlighted as
2252errors, use this: >
2253
2254 :let ncf_highlight_unknowns = 1
2255
2256If you don't want to highlight these errors, leave it unset.
2257
2258
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002259NROFF *nroff.vim* *ft-nroff-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002260
2261The nroff syntax file works with AT&T n/troff out of the box. You need to
2262activate the GNU groff extra features included in the syntax file before you
2263can use them.
2264
2265For example, Linux and BSD distributions use groff as their default text
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002266processing package. In order to activate the extra syntax highlighting
Bram Moolenaardad44732021-03-31 20:07:33 +02002267features for groff, arrange for files to be recognized as groff (see
2268|ft-groff-syntax|) or add the following option to your start-up files: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002269
Bram Moolenaardad44732021-03-31 20:07:33 +02002270 :let nroff_is_groff = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002271
2272Groff is different from the old AT&T n/troff that you may still find in
2273Solaris. Groff macro and request names can be longer than 2 characters and
2274there are extensions to the language primitives. For example, in AT&T troff
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002275you access the year as a 2-digit number with the request \(yr. In groff you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002276can use the same request, recognized for compatibility, or you can use groff's
2277native syntax, \[yr]. Furthermore, you can use a 4-digit year directly:
2278\[year]. Macro requests can be longer than 2 characters, for example, GNU mm
2279accepts the requests ".VERBON" and ".VERBOFF" for creating verbatim
2280environments.
2281
2282In order to obtain the best formatted output g/troff can give you, you should
2283follow a few simple rules about spacing and punctuation.
2284
22851. Do not leave empty spaces at the end of lines.
2286
22872. Leave one space and one space only after an end-of-sentence period,
2288 exclamation mark, etc.
2289
22903. For reasons stated below, it is best to follow all period marks with a
2291 carriage return.
2292
2293The reason behind these unusual tips is that g/n/troff have a line breaking
2294algorithm that can be easily upset if you don't follow the rules given above.
2295
2296Unlike TeX, troff fills text line-by-line, not paragraph-by-paragraph and,
2297furthermore, it does not have a concept of glue or stretch, all horizontal and
2298vertical space input will be output as is.
2299
2300Therefore, you should be careful about not using more space between sentences
2301than you intend to have in your final document. For this reason, the common
2302practice is to insert a carriage return immediately after all punctuation
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002303marks. If you want to have "even" text in your final processed output, you
Bram Moolenaarbf884932013-04-05 22:26:15 +02002304need to maintain regular spacing in the input text. To mark both trailing
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002305spaces and two or more spaces after a punctuation as an error, use: >
2306
2307 :let nroff_space_errors = 1
2308
2309Another technique to detect extra spacing and other errors that will interfere
2310with the correct typesetting of your file, is to define an eye-catching
2311highlighting definition for the syntax groups "nroffDefinition" and
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002312"nroffDefSpecial" in your configuration files. For example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002313
2314 hi def nroffDefinition term=italic cterm=italic gui=reverse
2315 hi def nroffDefSpecial term=italic,bold cterm=italic,bold
2316 \ gui=reverse,bold
2317
2318If you want to navigate preprocessor entries in your source file as easily as
2319with section markers, you can activate the following option in your .vimrc
2320file: >
2321
2322 let b:preprocs_as_sections = 1
2323
Bram Moolenaar69a7cb42004-06-20 12:51:53 +00002324As well, the syntax file adds an extra paragraph marker for the extended
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002325paragraph macro (.XP) in the ms package.
2326
2327Finally, there is a |groff.vim| syntax file that can be used for enabling
2328groff syntax highlighting either on a file basis or globally by default.
2329
2330
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002331OCAML *ocaml.vim* *ft-ocaml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002332
2333The OCaml syntax file handles files having the following prefixes: .ml,
2334.mli, .mll and .mly. By setting the following variable >
2335
2336 :let ocaml_revised = 1
2337
2338you can switch from standard OCaml-syntax to revised syntax as supported
2339by the camlp4 preprocessor. Setting the variable >
2340
2341 :let ocaml_noend_error = 1
2342
2343prevents highlighting of "end" as error, which is useful when sources
2344contain very long structures that Vim does not synchronize anymore.
2345
2346
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002347PAPP *papp.vim* *ft-papp-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002348
Bram Moolenaarade0d392020-01-21 22:33:58 +01002349The PApp syntax file handles .papp files and, to a lesser extent, .pxml
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002350and .pxsl files which are all a mixture of perl/xml/html/other using xml
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002351as the top-level file format. By default everything inside phtml or pxml
2352sections is treated as a string with embedded preprocessor commands. If
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002353you set the variable: >
2354
2355 :let papp_include_html=1
2356
2357in your startup file it will try to syntax-hilight html code inside phtml
2358sections, but this is relatively slow and much too colourful to be able to
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002359edit sensibly. ;)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002360
2361The newest version of the papp.vim syntax file can usually be found at
2362http://papp.plan9.de.
2363
2364
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002365PASCAL *pascal.vim* *ft-pascal-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002366
Bram Moolenaar98a29d02021-01-18 19:55:44 +01002367Files matching "*.p" could be Progress or Pascal and those matching "*.pp"
2368could be Puppet or Pascal. If the automatic detection doesn't work for you,
2369or you only edit Pascal files, use this in your startup vimrc: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002370
Bram Moolenaar98a29d02021-01-18 19:55:44 +01002371 :let filetype_p = "pascal"
2372 :let filetype_pp = "pascal"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002373
2374The Pascal syntax file has been extended to take into account some extensions
2375provided by Turbo Pascal, Free Pascal Compiler and GNU Pascal Compiler.
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002376Delphi keywords are also supported. By default, Turbo Pascal 7.0 features are
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002377enabled. If you prefer to stick with the standard Pascal keywords, add the
2378following line to your startup file: >
2379
2380 :let pascal_traditional=1
2381
2382To switch on Delphi specific constructions (such as one-line comments,
2383keywords, etc): >
2384
2385 :let pascal_delphi=1
2386
2387
2388The option pascal_symbol_operator controls whether symbol operators such as +,
2389*, .., etc. are displayed using the Operator color or not. To colorize symbol
2390operators, add the following line to your startup file: >
2391
2392 :let pascal_symbol_operator=1
2393
2394Some functions are highlighted by default. To switch it off: >
2395
2396 :let pascal_no_functions=1
2397
Bram Moolenaar996343d2010-07-04 22:20:21 +02002398Furthermore, there are specific variables for some compilers. Besides
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002399pascal_delphi, there are pascal_gpc and pascal_fpc. Default extensions try to
2400match Turbo Pascal. >
2401
2402 :let pascal_gpc=1
2403
2404or >
2405
2406 :let pascal_fpc=1
2407
2408To ensure that strings are defined on a single line, you can define the
2409pascal_one_line_string variable. >
2410
2411 :let pascal_one_line_string=1
2412
2413If you dislike <Tab> chars, you can set the pascal_no_tabs variable. Tabs
2414will be highlighted as Error. >
2415
2416 :let pascal_no_tabs=1
2417
2418
2419
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002420PERL *perl.vim* *ft-perl-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002421
2422There are a number of possible options to the perl syntax highlighting.
2423
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002424Inline POD highlighting is now turned on by default. If you don't wish
2425to have the added complexity of highlighting POD embedded within Perl
2426files, you may set the 'perl_include_pod' option to 0: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002427
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002428 :let perl_include_pod = 0
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002429
Bram Moolenaar822ff862014-06-12 21:46:14 +02002430To reduce the complexity of parsing (and increase performance) you can switch
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002431off two elements in the parsing of variable names and contents. >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002432
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002433To handle package references in variable and function names not differently
2434from the rest of the name (like 'PkgName::' in '$PkgName::VarName'): >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002435
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002436 :let perl_no_scope_in_variables = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002437
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002438(In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_want_scope_in_variables"
2439enabled it.)
2440
2441If you do not want complex things like '@{${"foo"}}' to be parsed: >
2442
2443 :let perl_no_extended_vars = 1
2444
Bram Moolenaar3fdfa4a2004-10-07 21:02:47 +00002445(In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_extended_vars" enabled it.)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002446
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002447The coloring strings can be changed. By default strings and qq friends will be
2448highlighted like the first line. If you set the variable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002449perl_string_as_statement, it will be highlighted as in the second line.
2450
2451 "hello world!"; qq|hello world|;
2452 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^NN^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^N (unlet perl_string_as_statement)
2453 S^^^^^^^^^^^^SNNSSS^^^^^^^^^^^SN (let perl_string_as_statement)
2454
2455(^ = perlString, S = perlStatement, N = None at all)
2456
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002457The syncing has 3 options. The first two switch off some triggering of
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002458synchronization and should only be needed in case it fails to work properly.
2459If while scrolling all of a sudden the whole screen changes color completely
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002460then you should try and switch off one of those. Let me know if you can figure
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002461out the line that causes the mistake.
2462
2463One triggers on "^\s*sub\s*" and the other on "^[$@%]" more or less. >
2464
2465 :let perl_no_sync_on_sub
2466 :let perl_no_sync_on_global_var
2467
2468Below you can set the maximum distance VIM should look for starting points for
2469its attempts in syntax highlighting. >
2470
2471 :let perl_sync_dist = 100
2472
2473If you want to use folding with perl, set perl_fold: >
2474
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002475 :let perl_fold = 1
2476
2477If you want to fold blocks in if statements, etc. as well set the following: >
2478
2479 :let perl_fold_blocks = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002480
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002481Subroutines are folded by default if 'perl_fold' is set. If you do not want
2482this, you can set 'perl_nofold_subs': >
Bram Moolenaar8ada17c2006-01-19 22:16:24 +00002483
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002484 :let perl_nofold_subs = 1
Bram Moolenaar8ada17c2006-01-19 22:16:24 +00002485
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002486Anonymous subroutines are not folded by default; you may enable their folding
2487via 'perl_fold_anonymous_subs': >
Bram Moolenaar8ada17c2006-01-19 22:16:24 +00002488
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002489 :let perl_fold_anonymous_subs = 1
2490
2491Packages are also folded by default if 'perl_fold' is set. To disable this
2492behavior, set 'perl_nofold_packages': >
2493
2494 :let perl_nofold_packages = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002495
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002496PHP3 and PHP4 *php.vim* *php3.vim* *ft-php-syntax* *ft-php3-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002497
2498[note: previously this was called "php3", but since it now also supports php4
2499it has been renamed to "php"]
2500
2501There are the following options for the php syntax highlighting.
2502
2503If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings: >
2504
2505 let php_sql_query = 1
2506
2507For highlighting the Baselib methods: >
2508
2509 let php_baselib = 1
2510
2511Enable HTML syntax highlighting inside strings: >
2512
2513 let php_htmlInStrings = 1
2514
2515Using the old colorstyle: >
2516
2517 let php_oldStyle = 1
2518
2519Enable highlighting ASP-style short tags: >
2520
2521 let php_asp_tags = 1
2522
2523Disable short tags: >
2524
2525 let php_noShortTags = 1
2526
2527For highlighting parent error ] or ): >
2528
2529 let php_parent_error_close = 1
2530
Bram Moolenaar543b7ef2013-06-01 14:50:56 +02002531For skipping a php end tag, if there exists an open ( or [ without a closing
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002532one: >
2533
2534 let php_parent_error_open = 1
2535
2536Enable folding for classes and functions: >
2537
2538 let php_folding = 1
2539
2540Selecting syncing method: >
2541
2542 let php_sync_method = x
2543
2544x = -1 to sync by search (default),
2545x > 0 to sync at least x lines backwards,
2546x = 0 to sync from start.
2547
2548
Bram Moolenaard2cec5b2006-03-28 21:08:56 +00002549PLAINTEX *plaintex.vim* *ft-plaintex-syntax*
2550
2551TeX is a typesetting language, and plaintex is the file type for the "plain"
2552variant of TeX. If you never want your *.tex files recognized as plain TeX,
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00002553see |ft-tex-plugin|.
Bram Moolenaard2cec5b2006-03-28 21:08:56 +00002554
2555This syntax file has the option >
2556
2557 let g:plaintex_delimiters = 1
2558
2559if you want to highlight brackets "[]" and braces "{}".
2560
2561
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002562PPWIZARD *ppwiz.vim* *ft-ppwiz-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002563
2564PPWizard is a preprocessor for HTML and OS/2 INF files
2565
2566This syntax file has the options:
2567
2568- ppwiz_highlight_defs : determines highlighting mode for PPWizard's
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002569 definitions. Possible values are
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002570
2571 ppwiz_highlight_defs = 1 : PPWizard #define statements retain the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002572 colors of their contents (e.g. PPWizard macros and variables)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002573
2574 ppwiz_highlight_defs = 2 : preprocessor #define and #evaluate
2575 statements are shown in a single color with the exception of line
2576 continuation symbols
2577
2578 The default setting for ppwiz_highlight_defs is 1.
2579
2580- ppwiz_with_html : If the value is 1 (the default), highlight literal
2581 HTML code; if 0, treat HTML code like ordinary text.
2582
2583
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002584PHTML *phtml.vim* *ft-phtml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002585
2586There are two options for the phtml syntax highlighting.
2587
2588If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >
2589
2590 :let phtml_sql_query = 1
2591
2592For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
2593set "phtml_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
2594
2595 :let phtml_minlines = 200
2596
2597
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002598POSTSCRIPT *postscr.vim* *ft-postscr-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002599
2600There are several options when it comes to highlighting PostScript.
2601
2602First which version of the PostScript language to highlight. There are
2603currently three defined language versions, or levels. Level 1 is the original
2604and base version, and includes all extensions prior to the release of level 2.
2605Level 2 is the most common version around, and includes its own set of
2606extensions prior to the release of level 3. Level 3 is currently the highest
2607level supported. You select which level of the PostScript language you want
2608highlighted by defining the postscr_level variable as follows: >
2609
2610 :let postscr_level=2
2611
2612If this variable is not defined it defaults to 2 (level 2) since this is
2613the most prevalent version currently.
2614
2615Note, not all PS interpreters will support all language features for a
2616particular language level. In particular the %!PS-Adobe-3.0 at the start of
2617PS files does NOT mean the PostScript present is level 3 PostScript!
2618
2619If you are working with Display PostScript, you can include highlighting of
2620Display PS language features by defining the postscr_display variable as
2621follows: >
2622
2623 :let postscr_display=1
2624
2625If you are working with Ghostscript, you can include highlighting of
2626Ghostscript specific language features by defining the variable
2627postscr_ghostscript as follows: >
2628
2629 :let postscr_ghostscript=1
2630
2631PostScript is a large language, with many predefined elements. While it
2632useful to have all these elements highlighted, on slower machines this can
2633cause Vim to slow down. In an attempt to be machine friendly font names and
2634character encodings are not highlighted by default. Unless you are working
2635explicitly with either of these this should be ok. If you want them to be
2636highlighted you should set one or both of the following variables: >
2637
2638 :let postscr_fonts=1
2639 :let postscr_encodings=1
2640
2641There is a stylistic option to the highlighting of and, or, and not. In
2642PostScript the function of these operators depends on the types of their
2643operands - if the operands are booleans then they are the logical operators,
2644if they are integers then they are binary operators. As binary and logical
2645operators can be highlighted differently they have to be highlighted one way
2646or the other. By default they are treated as logical operators. They can be
2647highlighted as binary operators by defining the variable
2648postscr_andornot_binary as follows: >
2649
2650 :let postscr_andornot_binary=1
2651<
2652
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002653 *ptcap.vim* *ft-printcap-syntax*
2654PRINTCAP + TERMCAP *ft-ptcap-syntax* *ft-termcap-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002655
2656This syntax file applies to the printcap and termcap databases.
2657
2658In order for Vim to recognize printcap/termcap files that do not match
2659the patterns *printcap*, or *termcap*, you must put additional patterns
2660appropriate to your system in your |myfiletypefile| file. For these
2661patterns, you must set the variable "b:ptcap_type" to either "print" or
2662"term", and then the 'filetype' option to ptcap.
2663
2664For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/termcaps/ as termcap
2665files, add the following: >
2666
2667 :au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/termcaps/* let b:ptcap_type = "term" |
2668 \ set filetype=ptcap
2669
2670If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which
2671are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "ptcap_minlines"
2672internal variable to a larger number: >
2673
2674 :let ptcap_minlines = 50
2675
2676(The default is 20 lines.)
2677
2678
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002679PROGRESS *progress.vim* *ft-progress-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002680
2681Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection
2682doesn't work for you, or you don't edit cweb at all, use this in your
2683startup vimrc: >
2684 :let filetype_w = "progress"
2685The same happens for "*.i", which could be assembly, and "*.p", which could be
2686Pascal. Use this if you don't use assembly and Pascal: >
2687 :let filetype_i = "progress"
2688 :let filetype_p = "progress"
2689
2690
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002691PYTHON *python.vim* *ft-python-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002692
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002693There are six options to control Python syntax highlighting.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002694
2695For highlighted numbers: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002696 :let python_no_number_highlight = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002697
2698For highlighted builtin functions: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002699 :let python_no_builtin_highlight = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002700
2701For highlighted standard exceptions: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002702 :let python_no_exception_highlight = 1
2703
2704For highlighted doctests and code inside: >
2705 :let python_no_doctest_highlight = 1
2706or >
2707 :let python_no_doctest_code_highlight = 1
2708(first option implies second one).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002709
Bram Moolenaar4a748032010-09-30 21:47:56 +02002710For highlighted trailing whitespace and mix of spaces and tabs: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002711 :let python_space_error_highlight = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002712
2713If you want all possible Python highlighting (the same as setting the
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002714preceding last option and unsetting all other ones): >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002715 :let python_highlight_all = 1
2716
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002717Note: only existence of these options matter, not their value. You can replace
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002718 1 above with anything.
2719
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002720QUAKE *quake.vim* *ft-quake-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002721
Bram Moolenaarade0d392020-01-21 22:33:58 +01002722The Quake syntax definition should work for most FPS (First Person Shooter)
2723based on one of the Quake engines. However, the command names vary a bit
2724between the three games (Quake, Quake 2, and Quake 3 Arena) so the syntax
2725definition checks for the existence of three global variables to allow users
2726to specify what commands are legal in their files. The three variables can
2727be set for the following effects:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002728
2729set to highlight commands only available in Quake: >
2730 :let quake_is_quake1 = 1
2731
2732set to highlight commands only available in Quake 2: >
2733 :let quake_is_quake2 = 1
2734
2735set to highlight commands only available in Quake 3 Arena: >
2736 :let quake_is_quake3 = 1
2737
2738Any combination of these three variables is legal, but might highlight more
2739commands than are actually available to you by the game.
2740
2741
Bram Moolenaarfc65cab2018-08-28 22:58:02 +02002742R *r.vim* *ft-r-syntax*
2743
2744The parsing of R code for syntax highlight starts 40 lines backwards, but you
2745can set a different value in your |vimrc|. Example: >
2746 let r_syntax_minlines = 60
2747
2748You can also turn off syntax highlighting of ROxygen: >
2749 let r_syntax_hl_roxygen = 0
2750
2751enable folding of code delimited by parentheses, square brackets and curly
2752braces: >
2753 let r_syntax_folding = 1
2754
2755and highlight as functions all keywords followed by an opening parenthesis: >
2756 let r_syntax_fun_pattern = 1
2757
2758
2759R MARKDOWN *rmd.vim* *ft-rmd-syntax*
2760
2761To disable syntax highlight of YAML header, add to your |vimrc|: >
2762 let rmd_syn_hl_yaml = 0
2763
2764To disable syntax highlighting of citation keys: >
2765 let rmd_syn_hl_citations = 0
2766
2767To highlight R code in knitr chunk headers: >
2768 let rmd_syn_hl_chunk = 1
2769
2770By default, chunks of R code will be highlighted following the rules of R
2771language. If you want proper syntax highlighting of chunks of other languages,
2772you should add them to either `markdown_fenced_languages` or
2773`rmd_fenced_languages`. For example to properly highlight both R and Python,
2774you may add this to your |vimrc|: >
2775 let rmd_fenced_languages = ['r', 'python']
2776
2777
2778R RESTRUCTURED TEXT *rrst.vim* *ft-rrst-syntax*
2779
2780To highlight R code in knitr chunk headers, add to your |vimrc|: >
2781 let rrst_syn_hl_chunk = 1
2782
2783
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002784READLINE *readline.vim* *ft-readline-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002785
2786The readline library is primarily used by the BASH shell, which adds quite a
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002787few commands and options to the ones already available. To highlight these
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002788items as well you can add the following to your |vimrc| or just type it in the
2789command line before loading a file with the readline syntax: >
2790 let readline_has_bash = 1
2791
2792This will add highlighting for the commands that BASH (version 2.05a and
2793later, and part earlier) adds.
2794
2795
Bram Moolenaar95a9dd12019-12-19 22:12:03 +01002796REGO *rego.vim* *ft-rego-syntax*
2797
2798Rego is a query language developed by Styra. It is mostly used as a policy
2799language for kubernetes, but can be applied to almost anything. Files with
2800the following extensions are recognized as rego files: .rego.
2801
2802
Bram Moolenaar97d62492012-11-15 21:28:22 +01002803RESTRUCTURED TEXT *rst.vim* *ft-rst-syntax*
2804
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002805Syntax highlighting is enabled for code blocks within the document for a
2806select number of file types. See $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/rst.vim for the default
2807syntax list.
2808
2809To set a user-defined list of code block syntax highlighting: >
Bram Moolenaar97d62492012-11-15 21:28:22 +01002810 let rst_syntax_code_list = ['vim', 'lisp', ...]
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002811
2812To assign multiple code block types to a single syntax, define
2813`rst_syntax_code_list` as a mapping: >
2814 let rst_syntax_code_list = {
Bram Moolenaar0c0734d2019-11-26 21:44:46 +01002815 \ 'cpp': ['cpp', 'c++'],
2816 \ 'bash': ['bash', 'sh'],
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002817 ...
Bram Moolenaar0c0734d2019-11-26 21:44:46 +01002818 \ }
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002819
2820To use color highlighting for emphasis text: >
2821 let rst_use_emphasis_colors = 1
2822
2823To enable folding of sections: >
2824 let rst_fold_enabled = 1
2825
2826Note that folding can cause performance issues on some platforms.
2827
Bram Moolenaar97d62492012-11-15 21:28:22 +01002828
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002829REXX *rexx.vim* *ft-rexx-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002830
2831If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
2832when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "rexx_minlines" internal variable
2833to a larger number: >
2834 :let rexx_minlines = 50
2835This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first
2836displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger
2837number is that redrawing can become slow.
2838
Bram Moolenaar97293012011-07-18 19:40:27 +02002839Vim tries to guess what type a ".r" file is. If it can't be detected (from
2840comment lines), the default is "r". To make the default rexx add this line to
2841your .vimrc: *g:filetype_r*
2842>
2843 :let g:filetype_r = "r"
2844
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002845
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002846RUBY *ruby.vim* *ft-ruby-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002847
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002848 Ruby: Operator highlighting |ruby_operators|
2849 Ruby: Whitespace errors |ruby_space_errors|
2850 Ruby: Folding |ruby_fold| |ruby_foldable_groups|
2851 Ruby: Reducing expensive operations |ruby_no_expensive| |ruby_minlines|
2852 Ruby: Spellchecking strings |ruby_spellcheck_strings|
2853
2854 *ruby_operators*
2855 Ruby: Operator highlighting ~
2856
2857Operators can be highlighted by defining "ruby_operators": >
2858
2859 :let ruby_operators = 1
2860<
2861 *ruby_space_errors*
2862 Ruby: Whitespace errors ~
2863
2864Whitespace errors can be highlighted by defining "ruby_space_errors": >
2865
2866 :let ruby_space_errors = 1
2867<
2868This will highlight trailing whitespace and tabs preceded by a space character
2869as errors. This can be refined by defining "ruby_no_trail_space_error" and
2870"ruby_no_tab_space_error" which will ignore trailing whitespace and tabs after
2871spaces respectively.
2872
2873 *ruby_fold* *ruby_foldable_groups*
2874 Ruby: Folding ~
2875
2876Folding can be enabled by defining "ruby_fold": >
2877
2878 :let ruby_fold = 1
2879<
2880This will set the value of 'foldmethod' to "syntax" locally to the current
2881buffer or window, which will enable syntax-based folding when editing Ruby
2882filetypes.
2883
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002884Default folding is rather detailed, i.e., small syntax units like "if", "do",
2885"%w[]" may create corresponding fold levels.
2886
2887You can set "ruby_foldable_groups" to restrict which groups are foldable: >
2888
2889 :let ruby_foldable_groups = 'if case %'
2890<
2891The value is a space-separated list of keywords:
2892
2893 keyword meaning ~
2894 -------- ------------------------------------- ~
2895 ALL Most block syntax (default)
2896 NONE Nothing
2897 if "if" or "unless" block
2898 def "def" block
2899 class "class" block
2900 module "module" block
2901 do "do" block
2902 begin "begin" block
2903 case "case" block
2904 for "for", "while", "until" loops
2905 { Curly bracket block or hash literal
2906 [ Array literal
2907 % Literal with "%" notation, e.g.: %w(STRING), %!STRING!
2908 / Regexp
2909 string String and shell command output (surrounded by ', ", `)
2910 : Symbol
2911 # Multiline comment
2912 << Here documents
2913 __END__ Source code after "__END__" directive
2914
2915 *ruby_no_expensive*
2916 Ruby: Reducing expensive operations ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002917
2918By default, the "end" keyword is colorized according to the opening statement
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002919of the block it closes. While useful, this feature can be expensive; if you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002920experience slow redrawing (or you are on a terminal with poor color support)
2921you may want to turn it off by defining the "ruby_no_expensive" variable: >
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002922
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002923 :let ruby_no_expensive = 1
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00002924<
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002925In this case the same color will be used for all control keywords.
2926
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002927 *ruby_minlines*
2928
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002929If you do want this feature enabled, but notice highlighting errors while
2930scrolling backwards, which are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting
2931the "ruby_minlines" variable to a value larger than 50: >
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002932
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002933 :let ruby_minlines = 100
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00002934<
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002935Ideally, this value should be a number of lines large enough to embrace your
2936largest class or module.
2937
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002938 *ruby_spellcheck_strings*
2939 Ruby: Spellchecking strings ~
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002940
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002941Ruby syntax will perform spellchecking of strings if you define
2942"ruby_spellcheck_strings": >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002943
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002944 :let ruby_spellcheck_strings = 1
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00002945<
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00002946
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002947SCHEME *scheme.vim* *ft-scheme-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00002948
Bram Moolenaar72540672018-02-09 22:00:53 +01002949By default only R7RS keywords are highlighted and properly indented.
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00002950
Bram Moolenaar72540672018-02-09 22:00:53 +01002951scheme.vim also supports extensions of the CHICKEN Scheme->C compiler.
2952Define b:is_chicken or g:is_chicken, if you need them.
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00002953
2954
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002955SDL *sdl.vim* *ft-sdl-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002956
2957The SDL highlighting probably misses a few keywords, but SDL has so many
2958of them it's almost impossibly to cope.
2959
2960The new standard, SDL-2000, specifies that all identifiers are
2961case-sensitive (which was not so before), and that all keywords can be
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002962used either completely lowercase or completely uppercase. To have the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002963highlighting reflect this, you can set the following variable: >
2964 :let sdl_2000=1
2965
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002966This also sets many new keywords. If you want to disable the old
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002967keywords, which is probably a good idea, use: >
2968 :let SDL_no_96=1
2969
2970
2971The indentation is probably also incomplete, but right now I am very
2972satisfied with it for my own projects.
2973
2974
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002975SED *sed.vim* *ft-sed-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002976
2977To make tabs stand out from regular blanks (accomplished by using Todo
2978highlighting on the tabs), define "highlight_sedtabs" by putting >
2979
2980 :let highlight_sedtabs = 1
2981
2982in the vimrc file. (This special highlighting only applies for tabs
2983inside search patterns, replacement texts, addresses or text included
2984by an Append/Change/Insert command.) If you enable this option, it is
2985also a good idea to set the tab width to one character; by doing that,
2986you can easily count the number of tabs in a string.
2987
2988Bugs:
2989
2990 The transform command (y) is treated exactly like the substitute
2991 command. This means that, as far as this syntax file is concerned,
2992 transform accepts the same flags as substitute, which is wrong.
2993 (Transform accepts no flags.) I tolerate this bug because the
2994 involved commands need very complex treatment (95 patterns, one for
2995 each plausible pattern delimiter).
2996
2997
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002998SGML *sgml.vim* *ft-sgml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002999
3000The coloring scheme for tags in the SGML file works as follows.
3001
3002The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag.
3003This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for
3004closing tags the 'Type' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those are
3005defined for you)
3006
3007Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag
3008names are not colored which makes it easy to spot errors.
3009
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003010Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003011names are colored differently than unknown ones.
3012
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003013Some SGML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003014are recognized by the sgml.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal
3015text is shown: <varname> <emphasis> <command> <function> <literal>
3016<replaceable> <ulink> and <link>.
3017
3018If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the
3019following syntax groups:
3020
3021 - sgmlBold
3022 - sgmlBoldItalic
3023 - sgmlUnderline
3024 - sgmlItalic
3025 - sgmlLink for links
3026
3027To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all and define the
3028following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files
3029are read during initialization) >
3030 let sgml_my_rendering=1
3031
3032You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your
3033vimrc file: >
3034 let sgml_no_rendering=1
3035
3036(Adapted from the html.vim help text by Claudio Fleiner <claudio@fleiner.com>)
3037
3038
Bram Moolenaar4466ad62020-11-21 13:16:30 +01003039 *ft-posix-syntax* *ft-dash-syntax*
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003040SH *sh.vim* *ft-sh-syntax* *ft-bash-syntax* *ft-ksh-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003041
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003042This covers syntax highlighting for the older Unix (Bourne) sh, and newer
3043shells such as bash, dash, posix, and the Korn shells.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003044
3045Vim attempts to determine which shell type is in use by specifying that
Bram Moolenaar91f84f62018-07-29 15:07:52 +02003046various filenames are of specific types, e.g.: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003047
3048 ksh : .kshrc* *.ksh
3049 bash: .bashrc* bashrc bash.bashrc .bash_profile* *.bash
3050<
Bram Moolenaar91f84f62018-07-29 15:07:52 +02003051See $VIMRUNTIME/filetype.vim for the full list of patterns. If none of these
3052cases pertain, then the first line of the file is examined (ex. looking for
3053/bin/sh /bin/ksh /bin/bash). If the first line specifies a shelltype, then
3054that shelltype is used. However some files (ex. .profile) are known to be
3055shell files but the type is not apparent. Furthermore, on many systems sh is
3056symbolically linked to "bash" (Linux, Windows+cygwin) or "ksh" (Posix).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003057
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003058One may specify a global default by instantiating one of the following
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003059variables in your <.vimrc>:
3060
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003061 ksh: >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003062 let g:is_kornshell = 1
Bram Moolenaarade0d392020-01-21 22:33:58 +01003063< posix: (using this is nearly the same as setting g:is_kornshell to 1) >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003064 let g:is_posix = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003065< bash: >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003066 let g:is_bash = 1
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003067< sh: (default) Bourne shell >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003068 let g:is_sh = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003069
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003070< (dash users should use posix)
3071
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +00003072If there's no "#! ..." line, and the user hasn't availed himself/herself of a
3073default sh.vim syntax setting as just shown, then syntax/sh.vim will assume
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003074the Bourne shell syntax. No need to quote RFCs or market penetration
3075statistics in error reports, please -- just select the default version of the
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003076sh your system uses and install the associated "let..." in your <.vimrc>.
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +00003077
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003078The syntax/sh.vim file provides several levels of syntax-based folding: >
3079
3080 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 0 (default, no syntax folding)
3081 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 1 (enable function folding)
3082 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 2 (enable heredoc folding)
3083 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 4 (enable if/do/for folding)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003084>
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003085then various syntax items (ie. HereDocuments and function bodies) become
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003086syntax-foldable (see |:syn-fold|). You also may add these together
3087to get multiple types of folding: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003088
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003089 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 3 (enables function and heredoc folding)
3090
3091If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards which are fixed
3092when one redraws with CTRL-L, try setting the "sh_minlines" internal variable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003093to a larger number. Example: >
3094
3095 let sh_minlines = 500
3096
3097This will make syntax synchronization start 500 lines before the first
3098displayed line. The default value is 200. The disadvantage of using a larger
3099number is that redrawing can become slow.
3100
3101If you don't have much to synchronize on, displaying can be very slow. To
3102reduce this, the "sh_maxlines" internal variable can be set. Example: >
3103
3104 let sh_maxlines = 100
3105<
3106The default is to use the twice sh_minlines. Set it to a smaller number to
3107speed up displaying. The disadvantage is that highlight errors may appear.
3108
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01003109syntax/sh.vim tries to flag certain problems as errors; usually things like
3110extra ']'s, 'done's, 'fi's, etc. If you find the error handling problematic
3111for your purposes, you may suppress such error highlighting by putting
3112the following line in your .vimrc: >
3113
3114 let g:sh_no_error= 1
3115<
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003116
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003117 *sh-embed* *sh-awk*
3118 Sh: EMBEDDING LANGUAGES~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003119
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003120You may wish to embed languages into sh. I'll give an example courtesy of
3121Lorance Stinson on how to do this with awk as an example. Put the following
3122file into $HOME/.vim/after/syntax/sh/awkembed.vim: >
3123
Bram Moolenaardae8d212016-02-27 22:40:16 +01003124 " AWK Embedding:
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003125 " ==============
3126 " Shamelessly ripped from aspperl.vim by Aaron Hope.
3127 if exists("b:current_syntax")
3128 unlet b:current_syntax
3129 endif
3130 syn include @AWKScript syntax/awk.vim
3131 syn region AWKScriptCode matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+[=\\]\@<!'+ skip=+\\'+ end=+'+ contains=@AWKScript contained
3132 syn region AWKScriptEmbedded matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+\<awk\>+ skip=+\\$+ end=+[=\\]\@<!'+me=e-1 contains=@shIdList,@shExprList2 nextgroup=AWKScriptCode
3133 syn cluster shCommandSubList add=AWKScriptEmbedded
3134 hi def link AWKCommand Type
3135<
3136This code will then let the awk code in the single quotes: >
3137 awk '...awk code here...'
3138be highlighted using the awk highlighting syntax. Clearly this may be
3139extended to other languages.
3140
3141
3142SPEEDUP *spup.vim* *ft-spup-syntax*
3143(AspenTech plant simulator)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003144
3145The Speedup syntax file has some options:
3146
3147- strict_subsections : If this variable is defined, only keywords for
3148 sections and subsections will be highlighted as statements but not
3149 other keywords (like WITHIN in the OPERATION section).
3150
3151- highlight_types : Definition of this variable causes stream types
3152 like temperature or pressure to be highlighted as Type, not as a
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003153 plain Identifier. Included are the types that are usually found in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003154 the DECLARE section; if you defined own types, you have to include
3155 them in the syntax file.
3156
3157- oneline_comments : this value ranges from 1 to 3 and determines the
3158 highlighting of # style comments.
3159
3160 oneline_comments = 1 : allow normal Speedup code after an even
3161 number of #s.
3162
3163 oneline_comments = 2 : show code starting with the second # as
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003164 error. This is the default setting.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003165
3166 oneline_comments = 3 : show the whole line as error if it contains
3167 more than one #.
3168
3169Since especially OPERATION sections tend to become very large due to
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003170PRESETting variables, syncing may be critical. If your computer is
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003171fast enough, you can increase minlines and/or maxlines near the end of
3172the syntax file.
3173
3174
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003175SQL *sql.vim* *ft-sql-syntax*
3176 *sqlinformix.vim* *ft-sqlinformix-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar1056d982006-03-09 22:37:52 +00003177 *sqlanywhere.vim* *ft-sqlanywhere-syntax*
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003178
Bram Moolenaar1056d982006-03-09 22:37:52 +00003179While there is an ANSI standard for SQL, most database engines add their own
3180custom extensions. Vim currently supports the Oracle and Informix dialects of
3181SQL. Vim assumes "*.sql" files are Oracle SQL by default.
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003182
Bram Moolenaar1056d982006-03-09 22:37:52 +00003183Vim currently has SQL support for a variety of different vendors via syntax
3184scripts. You can change Vim's default from Oracle to any of the current SQL
3185supported types. You can also easily alter the SQL dialect being used on a
3186buffer by buffer basis.
3187
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003188For more detailed instructions see |ft_sql.txt|.
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003189
3190
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003191TCSH *tcsh.vim* *ft-tcsh-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003192
3193This covers the shell named "tcsh". It is a superset of csh. See |csh.vim|
3194for how the filetype is detected.
3195
3196Tcsh does not allow \" in strings unless the "backslash_quote" shell variable
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003197is set. If you want VIM to assume that no backslash quote constructs exist add
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003198this line to your .vimrc: >
3199
3200 :let tcsh_backslash_quote = 0
3201
3202If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
3203when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "tcsh_minlines" internal variable
3204to a larger number: >
3205
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01003206 :let tcsh_minlines = 1000
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003207
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01003208This will make the syntax synchronization start 1000 lines before the first
3209displayed line. If you set "tcsh_minlines" to "fromstart", then
3210synchronization is done from the start of the file. The default value for
3211tcsh_minlines is 100. The disadvantage of using a larger number is that
3212redrawing can become slow.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003213
3214
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003215TEX *tex.vim* *ft-tex-syntax* *latex-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar1b884a02020-12-10 21:11:27 +01003216 *syntax-tex* *syntax-latex*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003217
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003218 Tex Contents~
3219 Tex: Want Syntax Folding? |tex-folding|
3220 Tex: No Spell Checking Wanted |g:tex_nospell|
3221 Tex: Don't Want Spell Checking In Comments? |tex-nospell|
3222 Tex: Want Spell Checking in Verbatim Zones? |tex-verb|
3223 Tex: Run-on Comments or MathZones |tex-runon|
3224 Tex: Slow Syntax Highlighting? |tex-slow|
3225 Tex: Want To Highlight More Commands? |tex-morecommands|
3226 Tex: Excessive Error Highlighting? |tex-error|
3227 Tex: Need a new Math Group? |tex-math|
3228 Tex: Starting a New Style? |tex-style|
3229 Tex: Taking Advantage of Conceal Mode |tex-conceal|
3230 Tex: Selective Conceal Mode |g:tex_conceal|
3231 Tex: Controlling iskeyword |g:tex_isk|
Bram Moolenaar6e932462014-09-09 18:48:09 +02003232 Tex: Fine Subscript and Superscript Control |tex-supersub|
Bram Moolenaar1b884a02020-12-10 21:11:27 +01003233 Tex: Match Check Control |tex-matchcheck|
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003234
3235 *tex-folding* *g:tex_fold_enabled*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003236 Tex: Want Syntax Folding? ~
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003237
3238As of version 28 of <syntax/tex.vim>, syntax-based folding of parts, chapters,
3239sections, subsections, etc are supported. Put >
3240 let g:tex_fold_enabled=1
3241in your <.vimrc>, and :set fdm=syntax. I suggest doing the latter via a
3242modeline at the end of your LaTeX file: >
3243 % vim: fdm=syntax
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003244If your system becomes too slow, then you might wish to look into >
Bram Moolenaar6c1e1572019-06-22 02:13:00 +02003245 https://vimhelp.org/vim_faq.txt.html#faq-29.7
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003246<
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003247 *g:tex_nospell*
3248 Tex: No Spell Checking Wanted~
3249
3250If you don't want spell checking anywhere in your LaTeX document, put >
3251 let g:tex_nospell=1
3252into your .vimrc. If you merely wish to suppress spell checking inside
3253comments only, see |g:tex_comment_nospell|.
3254
3255 *tex-nospell* *g:tex_comment_nospell*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003256 Tex: Don't Want Spell Checking In Comments? ~
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003257
3258Some folks like to include things like source code in comments and so would
3259prefer that spell checking be disabled in comments in LaTeX files. To do
3260this, put the following in your <.vimrc>: >
3261 let g:tex_comment_nospell= 1
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003262If you want to suppress spell checking everywhere inside your LaTeX document,
3263see |g:tex_nospell|.
3264
3265 *tex-verb* *g:tex_verbspell*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003266 Tex: Want Spell Checking in Verbatim Zones?~
Bram Moolenaar74cbdf02010-08-04 23:03:17 +02003267
3268Often verbatim regions are used for things like source code; seldom does
3269one want source code spell-checked. However, for those of you who do
3270want your verbatim zones spell-checked, put the following in your <.vimrc>: >
3271 let g:tex_verbspell= 1
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003272<
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003273 *tex-runon* *tex-stopzone*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003274 Tex: Run-on Comments or MathZones ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003275
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003276The <syntax/tex.vim> highlighting supports TeX, LaTeX, and some AmsTeX. The
3277highlighting supports three primary zones/regions: normal, texZone, and
3278texMathZone. Although considerable effort has been made to have these zones
3279terminate properly, zones delineated by $..$ and $$..$$ cannot be synchronized
3280as there's no difference between start and end patterns. Consequently, a
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003281special "TeX comment" has been provided >
3282 %stopzone
3283which will forcibly terminate the highlighting of either a texZone or a
3284texMathZone.
3285
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003286 *tex-slow* *tex-sync*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003287 Tex: Slow Syntax Highlighting? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003288
3289If you have a slow computer, you may wish to reduce the values for >
3290 :syn sync maxlines=200
3291 :syn sync minlines=50
3292(especially the latter). If your computer is fast, you may wish to
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003293increase them. This primarily affects synchronizing (i.e. just what group,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003294if any, is the text at the top of the screen supposed to be in?).
3295
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003296Another cause of slow highlighting is due to syntax-driven folding; see
3297|tex-folding| for a way around this.
3298
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003299 *g:tex_fast*
3300
3301Finally, if syntax highlighting is still too slow, you may set >
3302
3303 :let g:tex_fast= ""
3304
3305in your .vimrc. Used this way, the g:tex_fast variable causes the syntax
3306highlighting script to avoid defining any regions and associated
3307synchronization. The result will be much faster syntax highlighting; the
3308price: you will no longer have as much highlighting or any syntax-based
3309folding, and you will be missing syntax-based error checking.
3310
3311You may decide that some syntax is acceptable; you may use the following table
3312selectively to enable just some syntax highlighting: >
3313
3314 b : allow bold and italic syntax
3315 c : allow texComment syntax
3316 m : allow texMatcher syntax (ie. {...} and [...])
3317 M : allow texMath syntax
3318 p : allow parts, chapter, section, etc syntax
3319 r : allow texRefZone syntax (nocite, bibliography, label, pageref, eqref)
3320 s : allow superscript/subscript regions
3321 S : allow texStyle syntax
3322 v : allow verbatim syntax
3323 V : allow texNewEnv and texNewCmd syntax
3324<
3325As an example, let g:tex_fast= "M" will allow math-associated highlighting
3326but suppress all the other region-based syntax highlighting.
Bram Moolenaar6e932462014-09-09 18:48:09 +02003327(also see: |g:tex_conceal| and |tex-supersub|)
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003328
3329 *tex-morecommands* *tex-package*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003330 Tex: Want To Highlight More Commands? ~
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00003331
3332LaTeX is a programmable language, and so there are thousands of packages full
3333of specialized LaTeX commands, syntax, and fonts. If you're using such a
3334package you'll often wish that the distributed syntax/tex.vim would support
3335it. However, clearly this is impractical. So please consider using the
3336techniques in |mysyntaxfile-add| to extend or modify the highlighting provided
Bram Moolenaarb6b046b2011-12-30 13:11:27 +01003337by syntax/tex.vim. Please consider uploading any extensions that you write,
3338which typically would go in $HOME/after/syntax/tex/[pkgname].vim, to
3339http://vim.sf.net/.
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00003340
Bram Moolenaar93a1df22018-09-10 11:51:50 +02003341I've included some support for various popular packages on my website: >
3342
3343 http://www.drchip.org/astronaut/vim/index.html#LATEXPKGS
3344<
3345The syntax files there go into your .../after/syntax/tex/ directory.
3346
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003347 *tex-error* *g:tex_no_error*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003348 Tex: Excessive Error Highlighting? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003349
3350The <tex.vim> supports lexical error checking of various sorts. Thus,
3351although the error checking is ofttimes very useful, it can indicate
3352errors where none actually are. If this proves to be a problem for you,
3353you may put in your <.vimrc> the following statement: >
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003354 let g:tex_no_error=1
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003355and all error checking by <syntax/tex.vim> will be suppressed.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003356
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003357 *tex-math*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003358 Tex: Need a new Math Group? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003359
3360If you want to include a new math group in your LaTeX, the following
3361code shows you an example as to how you might do so: >
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003362 call TexNewMathZone(sfx,mathzone,starform)
3363You'll want to provide the new math group with a unique suffix
3364(currently, A-L and V-Z are taken by <syntax/tex.vim> itself).
3365As an example, consider how eqnarray is set up by <syntax/tex.vim>: >
3366 call TexNewMathZone("D","eqnarray",1)
3367You'll need to change "mathzone" to the name of your new math group,
3368and then to the call to it in .vim/after/syntax/tex.vim.
3369The "starform" variable, if true, implies that your new math group
3370has a starred form (ie. eqnarray*).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003371
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003372 *tex-style* *b:tex_stylish*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003373 Tex: Starting a New Style? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003374
3375One may use "\makeatletter" in *.tex files, thereby making the use of "@" in
3376commands available. However, since the *.tex file doesn't have one of the
3377following suffices: sty cls clo dtx ltx, the syntax highlighting will flag
3378such use of @ as an error. To solve this: >
3379
3380 :let b:tex_stylish = 1
3381 :set ft=tex
3382
3383Putting "let g:tex_stylish=1" into your <.vimrc> will make <syntax/tex.vim>
3384always accept such use of @.
3385
Bram Moolenaar611df5b2010-07-26 22:51:56 +02003386 *tex-cchar* *tex-cole* *tex-conceal*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003387 Tex: Taking Advantage of Conceal Mode~
Bram Moolenaar611df5b2010-07-26 22:51:56 +02003388
Bram Moolenaar477db062010-07-28 18:17:41 +02003389If you have |'conceallevel'| set to 2 and if your encoding is utf-8, then a
3390number of character sequences can be translated into appropriate utf-8 glyphs,
3391including various accented characters, Greek characters in MathZones, and
3392superscripts and subscripts in MathZones. Not all characters can be made into
3393superscripts or subscripts; the constraint is due to what utf-8 supports.
3394In fact, only a few characters are supported as subscripts.
3395
3396One way to use this is to have vertically split windows (see |CTRL-W_v|); one
3397with |'conceallevel'| at 0 and the other at 2; and both using |'scrollbind'|.
Bram Moolenaar611df5b2010-07-26 22:51:56 +02003398
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003399 *g:tex_conceal*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003400 Tex: Selective Conceal Mode~
3401
3402You may selectively use conceal mode by setting g:tex_conceal in your
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003403<.vimrc>. By default, g:tex_conceal is set to "admgs" to enable concealment
3404for the following sets of characters: >
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003405
3406 a = accents/ligatures
Bram Moolenaard38b0552012-04-25 19:07:41 +02003407 b = bold and italic
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003408 d = delimiters
3409 m = math symbols
3410 g = Greek
3411 s = superscripts/subscripts
3412<
3413By leaving one or more of these out, the associated conceal-character
3414substitution will not be made.
3415
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003416 *g:tex_isk* *g:tex_stylish*
3417 Tex: Controlling iskeyword~
3418
3419Normally, LaTeX keywords support 0-9, a-z, A-z, and 192-255 only. Latex
3420keywords don't support the underscore - except when in *.sty files. The
3421syntax highlighting script handles this with the following logic:
3422
3423 * If g:tex_stylish exists and is 1
3424 then the file will be treated as a "sty" file, so the "_"
3425 will be allowed as part of keywords
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01003426 (regardless of g:tex_isk)
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003427 * Else if the file's suffix is sty, cls, clo, dtx, or ltx,
3428 then the file will be treated as a "sty" file, so the "_"
3429 will be allowed as part of keywords
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01003430 (regardless of g:tex_isk)
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003431
3432 * If g:tex_isk exists, then it will be used for the local 'iskeyword'
3433 * Else the local 'iskeyword' will be set to 48-57,a-z,A-Z,192-255
3434
Bram Moolenaar6e932462014-09-09 18:48:09 +02003435 *tex-supersub* *g:tex_superscripts* *g:tex_subscripts*
3436 Tex: Fine Subscript and Superscript Control~
3437
3438 See |tex-conceal| for how to enable concealed character replacement.
3439
3440 See |g:tex_conceal| for selectively concealing accents, bold/italic,
3441 math, Greek, and superscripts/subscripts.
3442
3443 One may exert fine control over which superscripts and subscripts one
3444 wants syntax-based concealment for (see |:syn-cchar|). Since not all
3445 fonts support all characters, one may override the
3446 concealed-replacement lists; by default these lists are given by: >
3447
3448 let g:tex_superscripts= "[0-9a-zA-W.,:;+-<>/()=]"
3449 let g:tex_subscripts= "[0-9aehijklmnoprstuvx,+-/().]"
3450<
3451 For example, I use Luxi Mono Bold; it doesn't support subscript
3452 characters for "hklmnpst", so I put >
3453 let g:tex_subscripts= "[0-9aeijoruvx,+-/().]"
3454< in ~/.vim/ftplugin/tex/tex.vim in order to avoid having inscrutable
3455 utf-8 glyphs appear.
3456
Bram Moolenaar1b884a02020-12-10 21:11:27 +01003457 *tex-matchcheck* *g:tex_matchcheck*
3458 Tex: Match Check Control~
3459
3460 Sometimes one actually wants mismatched parentheses, square braces,
Bram Moolenaar2346a632021-06-13 19:02:49 +02003461 and or curly braces; for example, \text{(1,10]} is a range from but
3462 not including 1 to and including 10. This wish, of course, conflicts
Bram Moolenaar1b884a02020-12-10 21:11:27 +01003463 with the desire to provide delimiter mismatch detection. To
3464 accommodate these conflicting goals, syntax/tex.vim provides >
3465 g:tex_matchcheck = '[({[]'
3466< which is shown along with its default setting. So, if one doesn't
3467 want [] and () to be checked for mismatches, try using >
3468 let g:tex_matchcheck= '[{}]'
3469< If you don't want matching to occur inside bold and italicized
3470 regions, >
3471 let g:tex_excludematcher= 1
3472< will prevent the texMatcher group from being included in those regions.
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003473
Bram Moolenaar22dbc772013-06-28 18:44:48 +02003474TF *tf.vim* *ft-tf-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003475
Bram Moolenaar22dbc772013-06-28 18:44:48 +02003476There is one option for the tf syntax highlighting.
3477
3478For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
3479set "tf_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
3480
3481 :let tf_minlines = your choice
3482<
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003483VIM *vim.vim* *ft-vim-syntax*
3484 *g:vimsyn_minlines* *g:vimsyn_maxlines*
Bram Moolenaar996343d2010-07-04 22:20:21 +02003485There is a trade-off between more accurate syntax highlighting versus screen
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003486updating speed. To improve accuracy, you may wish to increase the
3487g:vimsyn_minlines variable. The g:vimsyn_maxlines variable may be used to
3488improve screen updating rates (see |:syn-sync| for more on this). >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003489
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003490 g:vimsyn_minlines : used to set synchronization minlines
3491 g:vimsyn_maxlines : used to set synchronization maxlines
3492<
3493 (g:vim_minlines and g:vim_maxlines are deprecated variants of
3494 these two options)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003495
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003496 *g:vimsyn_embed*
3497The g:vimsyn_embed option allows users to select what, if any, types of
3498embedded script highlighting they wish to have. >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003499
Bram Moolenaara0f849e2015-10-30 14:37:44 +01003500 g:vimsyn_embed == 0 : don't support any embedded scripts
3501 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'l' : support embedded lua
Bram Moolenaar7cba6c02013-09-05 22:13:31 +02003502 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'm' : support embedded mzscheme
3503 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'p' : support embedded perl
3504 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'P' : support embedded python
3505 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'r' : support embedded ruby
3506 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 't' : support embedded tcl
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003507<
Bram Moolenaar7cba6c02013-09-05 22:13:31 +02003508By default, g:vimsyn_embed is a string supporting interpreters that your vim
3509itself supports. Concatenate multiple characters to support multiple types
3510of embedded interpreters; ie. g:vimsyn_embed= "mp" supports embedded mzscheme
3511and embedded perl.
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003512 *g:vimsyn_folding*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003513
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003514Some folding is now supported with syntax/vim.vim: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003515
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003516 g:vimsyn_folding == 0 or doesn't exist: no syntax-based folding
3517 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'a' : augroups
3518 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'f' : fold functions
Bram Moolenaara0f849e2015-10-30 14:37:44 +01003519 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'l' : fold lua script
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003520 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'm' : fold mzscheme script
3521 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'p' : fold perl script
3522 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'P' : fold python script
3523 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'r' : fold ruby script
3524 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 't' : fold tcl script
Bram Moolenaar30b65812012-07-12 22:01:11 +02003525<
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003526 *g:vimsyn_noerror*
Bram Moolenaarb544f3c2017-02-23 19:03:28 +01003527Not all error highlighting that syntax/vim.vim does may be correct; Vim script
3528is a difficult language to highlight correctly. A way to suppress error
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003529highlighting is to put the following line in your |vimrc|: >
Bram Moolenaar437df8f2006-04-27 21:47:44 +00003530
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003531 let g:vimsyn_noerror = 1
3532<
Bram Moolenaar437df8f2006-04-27 21:47:44 +00003533
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003534
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003535XF86CONFIG *xf86conf.vim* *ft-xf86conf-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003536
3537The syntax of XF86Config file differs in XFree86 v3.x and v4.x. Both
3538variants are supported. Automatic detection is used, but is far from perfect.
3539You may need to specify the version manually. Set the variable
3540xf86conf_xfree86_version to 3 or 4 according to your XFree86 version in
3541your .vimrc. Example: >
3542 :let xf86conf_xfree86_version=3
3543When using a mix of versions, set the b:xf86conf_xfree86_version variable.
3544
3545Note that spaces and underscores in option names are not supported. Use
3546"SyncOnGreen" instead of "__s yn con gr_e_e_n" if you want the option name
3547highlighted.
3548
3549
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003550XML *xml.vim* *ft-xml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003551
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003552Xml namespaces are highlighted by default. This can be inhibited by
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003553setting a global variable: >
3554
3555 :let g:xml_namespace_transparent=1
3556<
3557 *xml-folding*
3558The xml syntax file provides syntax |folding| (see |:syn-fold|) between
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003559start and end tags. This can be turned on by >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003560
3561 :let g:xml_syntax_folding = 1
3562 :set foldmethod=syntax
3563
3564Note: syntax folding might slow down syntax highlighting significantly,
3565especially for large files.
3566
3567
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003568X Pixmaps (XPM) *xpm.vim* *ft-xpm-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003569
3570xpm.vim creates its syntax items dynamically based upon the contents of the
3571XPM file. Thus if you make changes e.g. in the color specification strings,
3572you have to source it again e.g. with ":set syn=xpm".
3573
3574To copy a pixel with one of the colors, yank a "pixel" with "yl" and insert it
3575somewhere else with "P".
3576
3577Do you want to draw with the mouse? Try the following: >
3578 :function! GetPixel()
Bram Moolenaar61660ea2006-04-07 21:40:07 +00003579 : let c = getline(".")[col(".") - 1]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003580 : echo c
3581 : exe "noremap <LeftMouse> <LeftMouse>r".c
3582 : exe "noremap <LeftDrag> <LeftMouse>r".c
3583 :endfunction
3584 :noremap <RightMouse> <LeftMouse>:call GetPixel()<CR>
3585 :set guicursor=n:hor20 " to see the color beneath the cursor
3586This turns the right button into a pipette and the left button into a pen.
3587It will work with XPM files that have one character per pixel only and you
3588must not click outside of the pixel strings, but feel free to improve it.
3589
3590It will look much better with a font in a quadratic cell size, e.g. for X: >
3591 :set guifont=-*-clean-medium-r-*-*-8-*-*-*-*-80-*
3592
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003593
3594YAML *yaml.vim* *ft-yaml-syntax*
3595
3596 *g:yaml_schema* *b:yaml_schema*
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01003597A YAML schema is a combination of a set of tags and a mechanism for resolving
3598non-specific tags. For user this means that YAML parser may, depending on
3599plain scalar contents, treat plain scalar (which can actually be only string
3600and nothing else) as a value of the other type: null, boolean, floating-point,
3601integer. `g:yaml_schema` option determines according to which schema values
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003602will be highlighted specially. Supported schemas are
3603
3604Schema Description ~
3605failsafe No additional highlighting.
3606json Supports JSON-style numbers, booleans and null.
3607core Supports more number, boolean and null styles.
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01003608pyyaml In addition to core schema supports highlighting timestamps,
3609 but there are some differences in what is recognized as
3610 numbers and many additional boolean values not present in core
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003611 schema.
3612
3613Default schema is `core`.
3614
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01003615Note that schemas are not actually limited to plain scalars, but this is the
3616only difference between schemas defined in YAML specification and the only
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003617difference defined in the syntax file.
3618
Bram Moolenaarf3913272016-02-25 00:00:01 +01003619
3620ZSH *zsh.vim* *ft-zsh-syntax*
3621
3622The syntax script for zsh allows for syntax-based folding: >
3623
3624 :let g:zsh_fold_enable = 1
3625
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003626==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010036276. Defining a syntax *:syn-define* *E410*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003628
3629Vim understands three types of syntax items:
3630
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +000036311. Keyword
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003632 It can only contain keyword characters, according to the 'iskeyword'
3633 option. It cannot contain other syntax items. It will only match with a
3634 complete word (there are no keyword characters before or after the match).
3635 The keyword "if" would match in "if(a=b)", but not in "ifdef x", because
3636 "(" is not a keyword character and "d" is.
3637
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +000036382. Match
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003639 This is a match with a single regexp pattern.
3640
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +000036413. Region
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003642 This starts at a match of the "start" regexp pattern and ends with a match
3643 with the "end" regexp pattern. Any other text can appear in between. A
3644 "skip" regexp pattern can be used to avoid matching the "end" pattern.
3645
3646Several syntax ITEMs can be put into one syntax GROUP. For a syntax group
3647you can give highlighting attributes. For example, you could have an item
3648to define a "/* .. */" comment and another one that defines a "// .." comment,
3649and put them both in the "Comment" group. You can then specify that a
3650"Comment" will be in bold font and have a blue color. You are free to make
3651one highlight group for one syntax item, or put all items into one group.
3652This depends on how you want to specify your highlighting attributes. Putting
3653each item in its own group results in having to specify the highlighting
3654for a lot of groups.
3655
3656Note that a syntax group and a highlight group are similar. For a highlight
3657group you will have given highlight attributes. These attributes will be used
3658for the syntax group with the same name.
3659
3660In case more than one item matches at the same position, the one that was
3661defined LAST wins. Thus you can override previously defined syntax items by
3662using an item that matches the same text. But a keyword always goes before a
3663match or region. And a keyword with matching case always goes before a
3664keyword with ignoring case.
3665
3666
3667PRIORITY *:syn-priority*
3668
3669When several syntax items may match, these rules are used:
3670
36711. When multiple Match or Region items start in the same position, the item
3672 defined last has priority.
36732. A Keyword has priority over Match and Region items.
36743. An item that starts in an earlier position has priority over items that
3675 start in later positions.
3676
3677
3678DEFINING CASE *:syn-case* *E390*
3679
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003680:sy[ntax] case [match | ignore]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003681 This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will work with
3682 matching case, when using "match", or with ignoring case, when using
3683 "ignore". Note that any items before this are not affected, and all
3684 items until the next ":syntax case" command are affected.
3685
Bram Moolenaar690afe12017-01-28 18:34:47 +01003686:sy[ntax] case
3687 Show either "syntax case match" or "syntax case ignore" (translated).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003688
Bram Moolenaare35a52a2020-05-31 19:48:53 +02003689
3690DEFINING FOLDLEVEL *:syn-foldlevel*
3691
3692:sy[ntax] foldlevel [start | minimum]
3693 This defines how the foldlevel of a line is computed when using
3694 foldmethod=syntax (see |fold-syntax| and |:syn-fold|):
3695
3696 start: Use level of item containing start of line.
3697 minimum: Use lowest local-minimum level of items on line.
3698
Bram Moolenaare7b1ea02020-08-07 19:54:59 +02003699 The default is "start". Use "minimum" to search a line horizontally
Bram Moolenaare35a52a2020-05-31 19:48:53 +02003700 for the lowest level contained on the line that is followed by a
3701 higher level. This produces more natural folds when syntax items
3702 may close and open horizontally within a line.
3703
3704:sy[ntax] foldlevel
3705 Show either "syntax foldlevel start" or "syntax foldlevel minimum".
3706
3707 {not meaningful when Vim was compiled without |+folding| feature}
3708
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003709SPELL CHECKING *:syn-spell*
3710
3711:sy[ntax] spell [toplevel | notoplevel | default]
3712 This defines where spell checking is to be done for text that is not
3713 in a syntax item:
3714
3715 toplevel: Text is spell checked.
3716 notoplevel: Text is not spell checked.
3717 default: When there is a @Spell cluster no spell checking.
3718
3719 For text in syntax items use the @Spell and @NoSpell clusters
3720 |spell-syntax|. When there is no @Spell and no @NoSpell cluster then
3721 spell checking is done for "default" and "toplevel".
3722
3723 To activate spell checking the 'spell' option must be set.
3724
Bram Moolenaar690afe12017-01-28 18:34:47 +01003725:sy[ntax] spell
3726 Show either "syntax spell toplevel", "syntax spell notoplevel" or
3727 "syntax spell default" (translated).
3728
3729
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003730SYNTAX ISKEYWORD SETTING *:syn-iskeyword*
3731
3732:sy[ntax] iskeyword [clear | {option}]
3733 This defines the keyword characters. It's like the 'iskeyword' option
3734 for but only applies to syntax highlighting.
3735
3736 clear: Syntax specific iskeyword setting is disabled and the
3737 buffer-local 'iskeyword' setting is used.
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01003738 {option} Set the syntax 'iskeyword' option to a new value.
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003739
3740 Example: >
3741 :syntax iskeyword @,48-57,192-255,$,_
3742<
3743 This would set the syntax specific iskeyword option to include all
3744 alphabetic characters, plus the numeric characters, all accented
3745 characters and also includes the "_" and the "$".
3746
3747 If no argument is given, the current value will be output.
3748
3749 Setting this option influences what |/\k| matches in syntax patterns
Bram Moolenaar298b4402016-01-28 22:38:53 +01003750 and also determines where |:syn-keyword| will be checked for a new
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003751 match.
3752
Bram Moolenaard0796902016-09-16 20:02:31 +02003753 It is recommended when writing syntax files, to use this command to
3754 set the correct value for the specific syntax language and not change
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003755 the 'iskeyword' option.
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003756
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003757DEFINING KEYWORDS *:syn-keyword*
3758
3759:sy[ntax] keyword {group-name} [{options}] {keyword} .. [{options}]
3760
3761 This defines a number of keywords.
3762
3763 {group-name} Is a syntax group name such as "Comment".
3764 [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below.
3765 {keyword} .. Is a list of keywords which are part of this group.
3766
3767 Example: >
3768 :syntax keyword Type int long char
3769<
3770 The {options} can be given anywhere in the line. They will apply to
3771 all keywords given, also for options that come after a keyword.
3772 These examples do exactly the same: >
3773 :syntax keyword Type contained int long char
3774 :syntax keyword Type int long contained char
3775 :syntax keyword Type int long char contained
Bram Moolenaar88774fd2015-08-25 19:52:04 +02003776< *E789* *E890*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003777 When you have a keyword with an optional tail, like Ex commands in
3778 Vim, you can put the optional characters inside [], to define all the
3779 variations at once: >
3780 :syntax keyword vimCommand ab[breviate] n[ext]
3781<
3782 Don't forget that a keyword can only be recognized if all the
3783 characters are included in the 'iskeyword' option. If one character
3784 isn't, the keyword will never be recognized.
3785 Multi-byte characters can also be used. These do not have to be in
3786 'iskeyword'.
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003787 See |:syn-iskeyword| for defining syntax specific iskeyword settings.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003788
3789 A keyword always has higher priority than a match or region, the
3790 keyword is used if more than one item matches. Keywords do not nest
3791 and a keyword can't contain anything else.
3792
3793 Note that when you have a keyword that is the same as an option (even
3794 one that isn't allowed here), you can not use it. Use a match
3795 instead.
3796
3797 The maximum length of a keyword is 80 characters.
3798
3799 The same keyword can be defined multiple times, when its containment
3800 differs. For example, you can define the keyword once not contained
3801 and use one highlight group, and once contained, and use a different
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003802 highlight group. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003803 :syn keyword vimCommand tag
3804 :syn keyword vimSetting contained tag
3805< When finding "tag" outside of any syntax item, the "vimCommand"
3806 highlight group is used. When finding "tag" in a syntax item that
3807 contains "vimSetting", the "vimSetting" group is used.
3808
3809
3810DEFINING MATCHES *:syn-match*
3811
Bram Moolenaar2ec618c2016-10-01 14:47:05 +02003812:sy[ntax] match {group-name} [{options}]
3813 [excludenl]
3814 [keepend]
3815 {pattern}
3816 [{options}]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003817
3818 This defines one match.
3819
3820 {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment".
3821 [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below.
3822 [excludenl] Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$"
3823 extend a containing match or region. Must be
3824 given before the pattern. |:syn-excludenl|
Bram Moolenaar2ec618c2016-10-01 14:47:05 +02003825 keepend Don't allow contained matches to go past a
3826 match with the end pattern. See
3827 |:syn-keepend|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003828 {pattern} The search pattern that defines the match.
3829 See |:syn-pattern| below.
3830 Note that the pattern may match more than one
3831 line, which makes the match depend on where
3832 Vim starts searching for the pattern. You
3833 need to make sure syncing takes care of this.
3834
3835 Example (match a character constant): >
3836 :syntax match Character /'.'/hs=s+1,he=e-1
3837<
3838
3839DEFINING REGIONS *:syn-region* *:syn-start* *:syn-skip* *:syn-end*
3840 *E398* *E399*
3841:sy[ntax] region {group-name} [{options}]
3842 [matchgroup={group-name}]
3843 [keepend]
3844 [extend]
3845 [excludenl]
Bram Moolenaare7b1ea02020-08-07 19:54:59 +02003846 start={start-pattern} ..
3847 [skip={skip-pattern}]
3848 end={end-pattern} ..
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003849 [{options}]
3850
3851 This defines one region. It may span several lines.
3852
3853 {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment".
3854 [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below.
3855 [matchgroup={group-name}] The syntax group to use for the following
3856 start or end pattern matches only. Not used
3857 for the text in between the matched start and
3858 end patterns. Use NONE to reset to not using
3859 a different group for the start or end match.
3860 See |:syn-matchgroup|.
3861 keepend Don't allow contained matches to go past a
3862 match with the end pattern. See
3863 |:syn-keepend|.
3864 extend Override a "keepend" for an item this region
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003865 is contained in. See |:syn-extend|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003866 excludenl Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$"
3867 extend a containing match or item. Only
3868 useful for end patterns. Must be given before
3869 the patterns it applies to. |:syn-excludenl|
Bram Moolenaare7b1ea02020-08-07 19:54:59 +02003870 start={start-pattern} The search pattern that defines the start of
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003871 the region. See |:syn-pattern| below.
Bram Moolenaare7b1ea02020-08-07 19:54:59 +02003872 skip={skip-pattern} The search pattern that defines text inside
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003873 the region where not to look for the end
3874 pattern. See |:syn-pattern| below.
Bram Moolenaare7b1ea02020-08-07 19:54:59 +02003875 end={end-pattern} The search pattern that defines the end of
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003876 the region. See |:syn-pattern| below.
3877
3878 Example: >
3879 :syntax region String start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+
3880<
3881 The start/skip/end patterns and the options can be given in any order.
3882 There can be zero or one skip pattern. There must be one or more
3883 start and end patterns. This means that you can omit the skip
3884 pattern, but you must give at least one start and one end pattern. It
3885 is allowed to have white space before and after the equal sign
3886 (although it mostly looks better without white space).
3887
3888 When more than one start pattern is given, a match with one of these
3889 is sufficient. This means there is an OR relation between the start
3890 patterns. The last one that matches is used. The same is true for
3891 the end patterns.
3892
3893 The search for the end pattern starts right after the start pattern.
3894 Offsets are not used for this. This implies that the match for the
3895 end pattern will never overlap with the start pattern.
3896
3897 The skip and end pattern can match across line breaks, but since the
3898 search for the pattern can start in any line it often does not do what
3899 you want. The skip pattern doesn't avoid a match of an end pattern in
3900 the next line. Use single-line patterns to avoid trouble.
3901
3902 Note: The decision to start a region is only based on a matching start
3903 pattern. There is no check for a matching end pattern. This does NOT
3904 work: >
3905 :syn region First start="(" end=":"
3906 :syn region Second start="(" end=";"
3907< The Second always matches before the First (last defined pattern has
3908 higher priority). The Second region then continues until the next
3909 ';', no matter if there is a ':' before it. Using a match does work: >
3910 :syn match First "(\_.\{-}:"
3911 :syn match Second "(\_.\{-};"
3912< This pattern matches any character or line break with "\_." and
3913 repeats that with "\{-}" (repeat as few as possible).
3914
3915 *:syn-keepend*
3916 By default, a contained match can obscure a match for the end pattern.
3917 This is useful for nesting. For example, a region that starts with
3918 "{" and ends with "}", can contain another region. An encountered "}"
3919 will then end the contained region, but not the outer region:
3920 { starts outer "{}" region
3921 { starts contained "{}" region
3922 } ends contained "{}" region
3923 } ends outer "{} region
3924 If you don't want this, the "keepend" argument will make the matching
3925 of an end pattern of the outer region also end any contained item.
3926 This makes it impossible to nest the same region, but allows for
3927 contained items to highlight parts of the end pattern, without causing
3928 that to skip the match with the end pattern. Example: >
3929 :syn match vimComment +"[^"]\+$+
3930 :syn region vimCommand start="set" end="$" contains=vimComment keepend
3931< The "keepend" makes the vimCommand always end at the end of the line,
3932 even though the contained vimComment includes a match with the <EOL>.
3933
3934 When "keepend" is not used, a match with an end pattern is retried
3935 after each contained match. When "keepend" is included, the first
3936 encountered match with an end pattern is used, truncating any
3937 contained matches.
3938 *:syn-extend*
3939 The "keepend" behavior can be changed by using the "extend" argument.
3940 When an item with "extend" is contained in an item that uses
3941 "keepend", the "keepend" is ignored and the containing region will be
3942 extended.
3943 This can be used to have some contained items extend a region while
3944 others don't. Example: >
3945
3946 :syn region htmlRef start=+<a>+ end=+</a>+ keepend contains=htmlItem,htmlScript
3947 :syn match htmlItem +<[^>]*>+ contained
3948 :syn region htmlScript start=+<script+ end=+</script[^>]*>+ contained extend
3949
3950< Here the htmlItem item does not make the htmlRef item continue
3951 further, it is only used to highlight the <> items. The htmlScript
3952 item does extend the htmlRef item.
3953
3954 Another example: >
3955 :syn region xmlFold start="<a>" end="</a>" fold transparent keepend extend
3956< This defines a region with "keepend", so that its end cannot be
3957 changed by contained items, like when the "</a>" is matched to
3958 highlight it differently. But when the xmlFold region is nested (it
3959 includes itself), the "extend" applies, so that the "</a>" of a nested
3960 region only ends that region, and not the one it is contained in.
3961
3962 *:syn-excludenl*
3963 When a pattern for a match or end pattern of a region includes a '$'
3964 to match the end-of-line, it will make a region item that it is
3965 contained in continue on the next line. For example, a match with
3966 "\\$" (backslash at the end of the line) can make a region continue
3967 that would normally stop at the end of the line. This is the default
3968 behavior. If this is not wanted, there are two ways to avoid it:
3969 1. Use "keepend" for the containing item. This will keep all
3970 contained matches from extending the match or region. It can be
3971 used when all contained items must not extend the containing item.
3972 2. Use "excludenl" in the contained item. This will keep that match
3973 from extending the containing match or region. It can be used if
3974 only some contained items must not extend the containing item.
3975 "excludenl" must be given before the pattern it applies to.
3976
3977 *:syn-matchgroup*
3978 "matchgroup" can be used to highlight the start and/or end pattern
3979 differently than the body of the region. Example: >
3980 :syntax region String matchgroup=Quote start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+
3981< This will highlight the quotes with the "Quote" group, and the text in
3982 between with the "String" group.
3983 The "matchgroup" is used for all start and end patterns that follow,
3984 until the next "matchgroup". Use "matchgroup=NONE" to go back to not
3985 using a matchgroup.
3986
3987 In a start or end pattern that is highlighted with "matchgroup" the
3988 contained items of the region are not used. This can be used to avoid
3989 that a contained item matches in the start or end pattern match. When
3990 using "transparent", this does not apply to a start or end pattern
3991 match that is highlighted with "matchgroup".
3992
3993 Here is an example, which highlights three levels of parentheses in
3994 different colors: >
3995 :sy region par1 matchgroup=par1 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par2
3996 :sy region par2 matchgroup=par2 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par3 contained
3997 :sy region par3 matchgroup=par3 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par1 contained
3998 :hi par1 ctermfg=red guifg=red
3999 :hi par2 ctermfg=blue guifg=blue
4000 :hi par3 ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen
Bram Moolenaaradc21822011-04-01 18:03:16 +02004001<
4002 *E849*
4003The maximum number of syntax groups is 19999.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004004
4005==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010040067. :syntax arguments *:syn-arguments*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004007
4008The :syntax commands that define syntax items take a number of arguments.
4009The common ones are explained here. The arguments may be given in any order
4010and may be mixed with patterns.
4011
4012Not all commands accept all arguments. This table shows which arguments
4013can not be used for all commands:
Bram Moolenaar09092152010-08-08 16:38:42 +02004014 *E395*
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004015 contains oneline fold display extend concealends~
4016:syntax keyword - - - - - -
4017:syntax match yes - yes yes yes -
4018:syntax region yes yes yes yes yes yes
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004019
4020These arguments can be used for all three commands:
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004021 conceal
4022 cchar
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004023 contained
4024 containedin
4025 nextgroup
4026 transparent
4027 skipwhite
4028 skipnl
4029 skipempty
4030
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004031conceal *conceal* *:syn-conceal*
4032
4033When the "conceal" argument is given, the item is marked as concealable.
Bram Moolenaar370df582010-06-22 05:16:38 +02004034Whether or not it is actually concealed depends on the value of the
Bram Moolenaarf5963f72010-07-23 22:10:27 +02004035'conceallevel' option. The 'concealcursor' option is used to decide whether
4036concealable items in the current line are displayed unconcealed to be able to
4037edit the line.
Bram Moolenaardc1f1642016-08-16 18:33:43 +02004038Another way to conceal text is with |matchadd()|.
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004039
4040concealends *:syn-concealends*
4041
4042When the "concealends" argument is given, the start and end matches of
4043the region, but not the contents of the region, are marked as concealable.
4044Whether or not they are actually concealed depends on the setting on the
4045'conceallevel' option. The ends of a region can only be concealed separately
4046in this way when they have their own highlighting via "matchgroup"
4047
4048cchar *:syn-cchar*
Bram Moolenaard58e9292011-02-09 17:07:58 +01004049 *E844*
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004050The "cchar" argument defines the character shown in place of the item
4051when it is concealed (setting "cchar" only makes sense when the conceal
4052argument is given.) If "cchar" is not set then the default conceal
Bram Moolenaard58e9292011-02-09 17:07:58 +01004053character defined in the 'listchars' option is used. The character cannot be
4054a control character such as Tab. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004055 :syntax match Entity "&amp;" conceal cchar=&
Bram Moolenaar9028b102010-07-11 16:58:51 +02004056See |hl-Conceal| for highlighting.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004057
4058contained *:syn-contained*
4059
4060When the "contained" argument is given, this item will not be recognized at
4061the top level, but only when it is mentioned in the "contains" field of
4062another match. Example: >
4063 :syntax keyword Todo TODO contained
4064 :syntax match Comment "//.*" contains=Todo
4065
4066
4067display *:syn-display*
4068
4069If the "display" argument is given, this item will be skipped when the
4070detected highlighting will not be displayed. This will speed up highlighting,
4071by skipping this item when only finding the syntax state for the text that is
4072to be displayed.
4073
4074Generally, you can use "display" for match and region items that meet these
4075conditions:
4076- The item does not continue past the end of a line. Example for C: A region
4077 for a "/*" comment can't contain "display", because it continues on the next
4078 line.
4079- The item does not contain items that continue past the end of the line or
4080 make it continue on the next line.
4081- The item does not change the size of any item it is contained in. Example
4082 for C: A match with "\\$" in a preprocessor match can't have "display",
4083 because it may make that preprocessor match shorter.
4084- The item does not allow other items to match that didn't match otherwise,
4085 and that item may extend the match too far. Example for C: A match for a
4086 "//" comment can't use "display", because a "/*" inside that comment would
4087 match then and start a comment which extends past the end of the line.
4088
4089Examples, for the C language, where "display" can be used:
4090- match with a number
4091- match with a label
4092
4093
4094transparent *:syn-transparent*
4095
4096If the "transparent" argument is given, this item will not be highlighted
4097itself, but will take the highlighting of the item it is contained in. This
4098is useful for syntax items that don't need any highlighting but are used
4099only to skip over a part of the text.
4100
4101The "contains=" argument is also inherited from the item it is contained in,
4102unless a "contains" argument is given for the transparent item itself. To
4103avoid that unwanted items are contained, use "contains=NONE". Example, which
4104highlights words in strings, but makes an exception for "vim": >
4105 :syn match myString /'[^']*'/ contains=myWord,myVim
4106 :syn match myWord /\<[a-z]*\>/ contained
4107 :syn match myVim /\<vim\>/ transparent contained contains=NONE
4108 :hi link myString String
4109 :hi link myWord Comment
4110Since the "myVim" match comes after "myWord" it is the preferred match (last
4111match in the same position overrules an earlier one). The "transparent"
4112argument makes the "myVim" match use the same highlighting as "myString". But
4113it does not contain anything. If the "contains=NONE" argument would be left
4114out, then "myVim" would use the contains argument from myString and allow
Bram Moolenaar2346a632021-06-13 19:02:49 +02004115"myWord" to be contained, which will be highlighted as a Comment. This
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004116happens because a contained match doesn't match inside itself in the same
4117position, thus the "myVim" match doesn't overrule the "myWord" match here.
4118
4119When you look at the colored text, it is like looking at layers of contained
4120items. The contained item is on top of the item it is contained in, thus you
4121see the contained item. When a contained item is transparent, you can look
4122through, thus you see the item it is contained in. In a picture:
4123
4124 look from here
4125
4126 | | | | | |
4127 V V V V V V
4128
4129 xxxx yyy more contained items
4130 .................... contained item (transparent)
4131 ============================= first item
4132
4133The 'x', 'y' and '=' represent a highlighted syntax item. The '.' represent a
4134transparent group.
4135
4136What you see is:
4137
4138 =======xxxx=======yyy========
4139
4140Thus you look through the transparent "....".
4141
4142
4143oneline *:syn-oneline*
4144
4145The "oneline" argument indicates that the region does not cross a line
4146boundary. It must match completely in the current line. However, when the
4147region has a contained item that does cross a line boundary, it continues on
4148the next line anyway. A contained item can be used to recognize a line
4149continuation pattern. But the "end" pattern must still match in the first
4150line, otherwise the region doesn't even start.
4151
4152When the start pattern includes a "\n" to match an end-of-line, the end
4153pattern must be found in the same line as where the start pattern ends. The
4154end pattern may also include an end-of-line. Thus the "oneline" argument
4155means that the end of the start pattern and the start of the end pattern must
4156be within one line. This can't be changed by a skip pattern that matches a
4157line break.
4158
4159
4160fold *:syn-fold*
4161
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00004162The "fold" argument makes the fold level increase by one for this item.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004163Example: >
4164 :syn region myFold start="{" end="}" transparent fold
4165 :syn sync fromstart
4166 :set foldmethod=syntax
4167This will make each {} block form one fold.
4168
4169The fold will start on the line where the item starts, and end where the item
4170ends. If the start and end are within the same line, there is no fold.
4171The 'foldnestmax' option limits the nesting of syntax folds.
Bram Moolenaare35a52a2020-05-31 19:48:53 +02004172See |:syn-foldlevel| to control how the foldlevel of a line is computed
4173from its syntax items.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004174{not available when Vim was compiled without |+folding| feature}
4175
4176
4177 *:syn-contains* *E405* *E406* *E407* *E408* *E409*
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004178contains={group-name},..
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004179
4180The "contains" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. These
4181groups will be allowed to begin inside the item (they may extend past the
4182containing group's end). This allows for recursive nesting of matches and
4183regions. If there is no "contains" argument, no groups will be contained in
4184this item. The group names do not need to be defined before they can be used
4185here.
4186
4187contains=ALL
4188 If the only item in the contains list is "ALL", then all
4189 groups will be accepted inside the item.
4190
4191contains=ALLBUT,{group-name},..
4192 If the first item in the contains list is "ALLBUT", then all
4193 groups will be accepted inside the item, except the ones that
4194 are listed. Example: >
4195 :syntax region Block start="{" end="}" ... contains=ALLBUT,Function
4196
4197contains=TOP
4198 If the first item in the contains list is "TOP", then all
4199 groups will be accepted that don't have the "contained"
4200 argument.
4201contains=TOP,{group-name},..
4202 Like "TOP", but excluding the groups that are listed.
4203
4204contains=CONTAINED
4205 If the first item in the contains list is "CONTAINED", then
4206 all groups will be accepted that have the "contained"
4207 argument.
4208contains=CONTAINED,{group-name},..
4209 Like "CONTAINED", but excluding the groups that are
4210 listed.
4211
4212
4213The {group-name} in the "contains" list can be a pattern. All group names
4214that match the pattern will be included (or excluded, if "ALLBUT" is used).
4215The pattern cannot contain white space or a ','. Example: >
4216 ... contains=Comment.*,Keyw[0-3]
4217The matching will be done at moment the syntax command is executed. Groups
4218that are defined later will not be matched. Also, if the current syntax
4219command defines a new group, it is not matched. Be careful: When putting
4220syntax commands in a file you can't rely on groups NOT being defined, because
4221the file may have been sourced before, and ":syn clear" doesn't remove the
4222group names.
4223
4224The contained groups will also match in the start and end patterns of a
4225region. If this is not wanted, the "matchgroup" argument can be used
4226|:syn-matchgroup|. The "ms=" and "me=" offsets can be used to change the
4227region where contained items do match. Note that this may also limit the
4228area that is highlighted
4229
4230
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004231containedin={group-name}... *:syn-containedin*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004232
4233The "containedin" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. The
4234item will be allowed to begin inside these groups. This works as if the
4235containing item has a "contains=" argument that includes this item.
4236
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004237The {group-name}... can be used just like for "contains", as explained above.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004238
4239This is useful when adding a syntax item afterwards. An item can be told to
4240be included inside an already existing item, without changing the definition
4241of that item. For example, to highlight a word in a C comment after loading
4242the C syntax: >
4243 :syn keyword myword HELP containedin=cComment contained
4244Note that "contained" is also used, to avoid that the item matches at the top
4245level.
4246
4247Matches for "containedin" are added to the other places where the item can
4248appear. A "contains" argument may also be added as usual. Don't forget that
4249keywords never contain another item, thus adding them to "containedin" won't
4250work.
4251
4252
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004253nextgroup={group-name},.. *:syn-nextgroup*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004254
4255The "nextgroup" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names,
4256separated by commas (just like with "contains", so you can also use patterns).
4257
4258If the "nextgroup" argument is given, the mentioned syntax groups will be
4259tried for a match, after the match or region ends. If none of the groups have
4260a match, highlighting continues normally. If there is a match, this group
4261will be used, even when it is not mentioned in the "contains" field of the
4262current group. This is like giving the mentioned group priority over all
4263other groups. Example: >
4264 :syntax match ccFoobar "Foo.\{-}Bar" contains=ccFoo
4265 :syntax match ccFoo "Foo" contained nextgroup=ccFiller
4266 :syntax region ccFiller start="." matchgroup=ccBar end="Bar" contained
4267
4268This will highlight "Foo" and "Bar" differently, and only when there is a
4269"Bar" after "Foo". In the text line below, "f" shows where ccFoo is used for
4270highlighting, and "bbb" where ccBar is used. >
4271
4272 Foo asdfasd Bar asdf Foo asdf Bar asdf
4273 fff bbb fff bbb
4274
4275Note the use of ".\{-}" to skip as little as possible until the next Bar.
4276when ".*" would be used, the "asdf" in between "Bar" and "Foo" would be
4277highlighted according to the "ccFoobar" group, because the ccFooBar match
4278would include the first "Foo" and the last "Bar" in the line (see |pattern|).
4279
4280
4281skipwhite *:syn-skipwhite*
4282skipnl *:syn-skipnl*
4283skipempty *:syn-skipempty*
4284
4285These arguments are only used in combination with "nextgroup". They can be
4286used to allow the next group to match after skipping some text:
Bram Moolenaardd2a0d82007-05-12 15:07:00 +00004287 skipwhite skip over space and tab characters
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004288 skipnl skip over the end of a line
4289 skipempty skip over empty lines (implies a "skipnl")
4290
4291When "skipwhite" is present, the white space is only skipped if there is no
4292next group that matches the white space.
4293
4294When "skipnl" is present, the match with nextgroup may be found in the next
4295line. This only happens when the current item ends at the end of the current
4296line! When "skipnl" is not present, the nextgroup will only be found after
4297the current item in the same line.
4298
4299When skipping text while looking for a next group, the matches for other
4300groups are ignored. Only when no next group matches, other items are tried
4301for a match again. This means that matching a next group and skipping white
4302space and <EOL>s has a higher priority than other items.
4303
4304Example: >
4305 :syn match ifstart "\<if.*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty
4306 :syn match ifline "[^ \t].*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty contained
4307 :syn match ifline "endif" contained
4308Note that the "[^ \t].*" match matches all non-white text. Thus it would also
4309match "endif". Therefore the "endif" match is put last, so that it takes
4310precedence.
4311Note that this example doesn't work for nested "if"s. You need to add
4312"contains" arguments to make that work (omitted for simplicity of the
4313example).
4314
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004315IMPLICIT CONCEAL *:syn-conceal-implicit*
4316
4317:sy[ntax] conceal [on|off]
4318 This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will define keywords,
4319 matches or regions with the "conceal" flag set. After ":syn conceal
4320 on", all subsequent ":syn keyword", ":syn match" or ":syn region"
4321 defined will have the "conceal" flag set implicitly. ":syn conceal
4322 off" returns to the normal state where the "conceal" flag must be
4323 given explicitly.
4324
Bram Moolenaar690afe12017-01-28 18:34:47 +01004325:sy[ntax] conceal
4326 Show either "syntax conceal on" or "syntax conceal off" (translated).
4327
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004328==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010043298. Syntax patterns *:syn-pattern* *E401* *E402*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004330
4331In the syntax commands, a pattern must be surrounded by two identical
4332characters. This is like it works for the ":s" command. The most common to
4333use is the double quote. But if the pattern contains a double quote, you can
4334use another character that is not used in the pattern. Examples: >
4335 :syntax region Comment start="/\*" end="\*/"
4336 :syntax region String start=+"+ end=+"+ skip=+\\"+
4337
4338See |pattern| for the explanation of what a pattern is. Syntax patterns are
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00004339always interpreted like the 'magic' option is set, no matter what the actual
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004340value of 'magic' is. And the patterns are interpreted like the 'l' flag is
4341not included in 'cpoptions'. This was done to make syntax files portable and
4342independent of 'compatible' and 'magic' settings.
4343
4344Try to avoid patterns that can match an empty string, such as "[a-z]*".
4345This slows down the highlighting a lot, because it matches everywhere.
4346
4347 *:syn-pattern-offset*
4348The pattern can be followed by a character offset. This can be used to
4349change the highlighted part, and to change the text area included in the
4350match or region (which only matters when trying to match other items). Both
4351are relative to the matched pattern. The character offset for a skip
4352pattern can be used to tell where to continue looking for an end pattern.
4353
4354The offset takes the form of "{what}={offset}"
4355The {what} can be one of seven strings:
4356
4357ms Match Start offset for the start of the matched text
4358me Match End offset for the end of the matched text
4359hs Highlight Start offset for where the highlighting starts
4360he Highlight End offset for where the highlighting ends
4361rs Region Start offset for where the body of a region starts
4362re Region End offset for where the body of a region ends
4363lc Leading Context offset past "leading context" of pattern
4364
4365The {offset} can be:
4366
4367s start of the matched pattern
4368s+{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right
4369s-{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left
4370e end of the matched pattern
4371e+{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right
4372e-{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left
Bram Moolenaarac7bd632013-03-19 11:35:58 +01004373{nr} (for "lc" only): start matching {nr} chars right of the start
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004374
4375Examples: "ms=s+1", "hs=e-2", "lc=3".
4376
4377Although all offsets are accepted after any pattern, they are not always
4378meaningful. This table shows which offsets are actually used:
4379
4380 ms me hs he rs re lc ~
4381match item yes yes yes yes - - yes
4382region item start yes - yes - yes - yes
4383region item skip - yes - - - - yes
4384region item end - yes - yes - yes yes
4385
4386Offsets can be concatenated, with a ',' in between. Example: >
4387 :syn match String /"[^"]*"/hs=s+1,he=e-1
4388<
4389 some "string" text
4390 ^^^^^^ highlighted
4391
4392Notes:
4393- There must be no white space between the pattern and the character
4394 offset(s).
4395- The highlighted area will never be outside of the matched text.
4396- A negative offset for an end pattern may not always work, because the end
4397 pattern may be detected when the highlighting should already have stopped.
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004398- Before Vim 7.2 the offsets were counted in bytes instead of characters.
Bram Moolenaar207f0092020-08-30 17:20:20 +02004399 This didn't work well for multibyte characters, so it was changed with the
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004400 Vim 7.2 release.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004401- The start of a match cannot be in a line other than where the pattern
4402 matched. This doesn't work: "a\nb"ms=e. You can make the highlighting
4403 start in another line, this does work: "a\nb"hs=e.
4404
4405Example (match a comment but don't highlight the /* and */): >
4406 :syntax region Comment start="/\*"hs=e+1 end="\*/"he=s-1
4407<
4408 /* this is a comment */
4409 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ highlighted
4410
4411A more complicated Example: >
4412 :syn region Exa matchgroup=Foo start="foo"hs=s+2,rs=e+2 matchgroup=Bar end="bar"me=e-1,he=e-1,re=s-1
4413<
4414 abcfoostringbarabc
4415 mmmmmmmmmmm match
Bram Moolenaar4770d092006-01-12 23:22:24 +00004416 sssrrreee highlight start/region/end ("Foo", "Exa" and "Bar")
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004417
4418Leading context *:syn-lc* *:syn-leading* *:syn-context*
4419
4420Note: This is an obsolete feature, only included for backwards compatibility
4421with previous Vim versions. It's now recommended to use the |/\@<=| construct
4422in the pattern.
4423
4424The "lc" offset specifies leading context -- a part of the pattern that must
4425be present, but is not considered part of the match. An offset of "lc=n" will
4426cause Vim to step back n columns before attempting the pattern match, allowing
4427characters which have already been matched in previous patterns to also be
4428used as leading context for this match. This can be used, for instance, to
4429specify that an "escaping" character must not precede the match: >
4430
4431 :syn match ZNoBackslash "[^\\]z"ms=s+1
4432 :syn match WNoBackslash "[^\\]w"lc=1
4433 :syn match Underline "_\+"
4434<
4435 ___zzzz ___wwww
4436 ^^^ ^^^ matches Underline
4437 ^ ^ matches ZNoBackslash
4438 ^^^^ matches WNoBackslash
4439
4440The "ms" offset is automatically set to the same value as the "lc" offset,
4441unless you set "ms" explicitly.
4442
4443
4444Multi-line patterns *:syn-multi-line*
4445
4446The patterns can include "\n" to match an end-of-line. Mostly this works as
4447expected, but there are a few exceptions.
4448
4449When using a start pattern with an offset, the start of the match is not
4450allowed to start in a following line. The highlighting can start in a
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004451following line though. Using the "\zs" item also requires that the start of
4452the match doesn't move to another line.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004453
4454The skip pattern can include the "\n", but the search for an end pattern will
4455continue in the first character of the next line, also when that character is
4456matched by the skip pattern. This is because redrawing may start in any line
4457halfway a region and there is no check if the skip pattern started in a
4458previous line. For example, if the skip pattern is "a\nb" and an end pattern
4459is "b", the end pattern does match in the second line of this: >
4460 x x a
4461 b x x
4462Generally this means that the skip pattern should not match any characters
4463after the "\n".
4464
4465
4466External matches *:syn-ext-match*
4467
4468These extra regular expression items are available in region patterns:
4469
Bram Moolenaar203d04d2013-06-06 21:36:40 +02004470 */\z(* */\z(\)* *E50* *E52* *E879*
Bram Moolenaara3e6bc92013-01-30 14:18:00 +01004471 \z(\) Marks the sub-expression as "external", meaning that it can be
4472 accessed from another pattern match. Currently only usable in
4473 defining a syntax region start pattern.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004474
4475 */\z1* */\z2* */\z3* */\z4* */\z5*
4476 \z1 ... \z9 */\z6* */\z7* */\z8* */\z9* *E66* *E67*
4477 Matches the same string that was matched by the corresponding
4478 sub-expression in a previous start pattern match.
4479
4480Sometimes the start and end patterns of a region need to share a common
4481sub-expression. A common example is the "here" document in Perl and many Unix
4482shells. This effect can be achieved with the "\z" special regular expression
4483items, which marks a sub-expression as "external", in the sense that it can be
4484referenced from outside the pattern in which it is defined. The here-document
4485example, for instance, can be done like this: >
4486 :syn region hereDoc start="<<\z(\I\i*\)" end="^\z1$"
4487
4488As can be seen here, the \z actually does double duty. In the start pattern,
4489it marks the "\(\I\i*\)" sub-expression as external; in the end pattern, it
Bram Moolenaarb4ff5182015-11-10 21:15:48 +01004490changes the \z1 back-reference into an external reference referring to the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004491first external sub-expression in the start pattern. External references can
4492also be used in skip patterns: >
4493 :syn region foo start="start \(\I\i*\)" skip="not end \z1" end="end \z1"
4494
4495Note that normal and external sub-expressions are completely orthogonal and
4496indexed separately; for instance, if the pattern "\z(..\)\(..\)" is applied
4497to the string "aabb", then \1 will refer to "bb" and \z1 will refer to "aa".
4498Note also that external sub-expressions cannot be accessed as back-references
4499within the same pattern like normal sub-expressions. If you want to use one
4500sub-expression as both a normal and an external sub-expression, you can nest
4501the two, as in "\(\z(...\)\)".
4502
4503Note that only matches within a single line can be used. Multi-line matches
4504cannot be referred to.
4505
4506==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010045079. Syntax clusters *:syn-cluster* *E400*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004508
4509:sy[ntax] cluster {cluster-name} [contains={group-name}..]
4510 [add={group-name}..]
4511 [remove={group-name}..]
4512
4513This command allows you to cluster a list of syntax groups together under a
4514single name.
4515
4516 contains={group-name}..
4517 The cluster is set to the specified list of groups.
4518 add={group-name}..
4519 The specified groups are added to the cluster.
4520 remove={group-name}..
4521 The specified groups are removed from the cluster.
4522
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00004523A cluster so defined may be referred to in a contains=.., containedin=..,
4524nextgroup=.., add=.. or remove=.. list with a "@" prefix. You can also use
4525this notation to implicitly declare a cluster before specifying its contents.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004526
4527Example: >
4528 :syntax match Thing "# [^#]\+ #" contains=@ThingMembers
4529 :syntax cluster ThingMembers contains=ThingMember1,ThingMember2
4530
4531As the previous example suggests, modifications to a cluster are effectively
4532retroactive; the membership of the cluster is checked at the last minute, so
4533to speak: >
4534 :syntax keyword A aaa
4535 :syntax keyword B bbb
4536 :syntax cluster AandB contains=A
4537 :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@AandB
4538 :syntax cluster AandB add=B " now both keywords are matched in Stuff
4539
4540This also has implications for nested clusters: >
4541 :syntax keyword A aaa
4542 :syntax keyword B bbb
4543 :syntax cluster SmallGroup contains=B
4544 :syntax cluster BigGroup contains=A,@SmallGroup
4545 :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@BigGroup
4546 :syntax cluster BigGroup remove=B " no effect, since B isn't in BigGroup
4547 :syntax cluster SmallGroup remove=B " now bbb isn't matched within Stuff
Bram Moolenaaradc21822011-04-01 18:03:16 +02004548<
4549 *E848*
4550The maximum number of clusters is 9767.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004551
4552==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100455310. Including syntax files *:syn-include* *E397*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004554
4555It is often useful for one language's syntax file to include a syntax file for
4556a related language. Depending on the exact relationship, this can be done in
4557two different ways:
4558
4559 - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be
4560 allowed at the top level in the including syntax, you can simply use
4561 the |:runtime| command: >
4562
4563 " In cpp.vim:
4564 :runtime! syntax/c.vim
4565 :unlet b:current_syntax
4566
4567< - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be
4568 contained within a region in the including syntax, you can use the
4569 ":syntax include" command:
4570
4571:sy[ntax] include [@{grouplist-name}] {file-name}
4572
4573 All syntax items declared in the included file will have the
4574 "contained" flag added. In addition, if a group list is specified,
4575 all top-level syntax items in the included file will be added to
4576 that list. >
4577
4578 " In perl.vim:
4579 :syntax include @Pod <sfile>:p:h/pod.vim
4580 :syntax region perlPOD start="^=head" end="^=cut" contains=@Pod
4581<
4582 When {file-name} is an absolute path (starts with "/", "c:", "$VAR"
4583 or "<sfile>") that file is sourced. When it is a relative path
4584 (e.g., "syntax/pod.vim") the file is searched for in 'runtimepath'.
4585 All matching files are loaded. Using a relative path is
4586 recommended, because it allows a user to replace the included file
Bram Moolenaareab6dff2020-03-01 19:06:45 +01004587 with their own version, without replacing the file that does the
4588 ":syn include".
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004589
Bram Moolenaaradc21822011-04-01 18:03:16 +02004590 *E847*
4591The maximum number of includes is 999.
4592
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004593==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100459411. Synchronizing *:syn-sync* *E403* *E404*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004595
4596Vim wants to be able to start redrawing in any position in the document. To
4597make this possible it needs to know the syntax state at the position where
4598redrawing starts.
4599
4600:sy[ntax] sync [ccomment [group-name] | minlines={N} | ...]
4601
4602There are four ways to synchronize:
46031. Always parse from the start of the file.
4604 |:syn-sync-first|
46052. Based on C-style comments. Vim understands how C-comments work and can
4606 figure out if the current line starts inside or outside a comment.
4607 |:syn-sync-second|
46083. Jumping back a certain number of lines and start parsing there.
4609 |:syn-sync-third|
46104. Searching backwards in the text for a pattern to sync on.
4611 |:syn-sync-fourth|
4612
4613 *:syn-sync-maxlines* *:syn-sync-minlines*
4614For the last three methods, the line range where the parsing can start is
4615limited by "minlines" and "maxlines".
4616
4617If the "minlines={N}" argument is given, the parsing always starts at least
4618that many lines backwards. This can be used if the parsing may take a few
4619lines before it's correct, or when it's not possible to use syncing.
4620
4621If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given, the number of lines that are searched
4622for a comment or syncing pattern is restricted to N lines backwards (after
4623adding "minlines"). This is useful if you have few things to sync on and a
4624slow machine. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar2b8388b2015-02-28 13:11:45 +01004625 :syntax sync maxlines=500 ccomment
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004626<
4627 *:syn-sync-linebreaks*
4628When using a pattern that matches multiple lines, a change in one line may
4629cause a pattern to no longer match in a previous line. This means has to
4630start above where the change was made. How many lines can be specified with
4631the "linebreaks" argument. For example, when a pattern may include one line
4632break use this: >
4633 :syntax sync linebreaks=1
4634The result is that redrawing always starts at least one line before where a
4635change was made. The default value for "linebreaks" is zero. Usually the
4636value for "minlines" is bigger than "linebreaks".
4637
4638
4639First syncing method: *:syn-sync-first*
4640>
4641 :syntax sync fromstart
4642
4643The file will be parsed from the start. This makes syntax highlighting
4644accurate, but can be slow for long files. Vim caches previously parsed text,
4645so that it's only slow when parsing the text for the first time. However,
Bram Moolenaarf1568ec2011-12-14 21:17:39 +01004646when making changes some part of the text needs to be parsed again (worst
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004647case: to the end of the file).
4648
4649Using "fromstart" is equivalent to using "minlines" with a very large number.
4650
4651
4652Second syncing method: *:syn-sync-second* *:syn-sync-ccomment*
4653
4654For the second method, only the "ccomment" argument needs to be given.
4655Example: >
4656 :syntax sync ccomment
4657
4658When Vim finds that the line where displaying starts is inside a C-style
4659comment, the last region syntax item with the group-name "Comment" will be
4660used. This requires that there is a region with the group-name "Comment"!
4661An alternate group name can be specified, for example: >
4662 :syntax sync ccomment javaComment
4663This means that the last item specified with "syn region javaComment" will be
4664used for the detected C comment region. This only works properly if that
4665region does have a start pattern "\/*" and an end pattern "*\/".
4666
4667The "maxlines" argument can be used to restrict the search to a number of
4668lines. The "minlines" argument can be used to at least start a number of
4669lines back (e.g., for when there is some construct that only takes a few
4670lines, but it hard to sync on).
4671
4672Note: Syncing on a C comment doesn't work properly when strings are used
4673that cross a line and contain a "*/". Since letting strings cross a line
4674is a bad programming habit (many compilers give a warning message), and the
4675chance of a "*/" appearing inside a comment is very small, this restriction
4676is hardly ever noticed.
4677
4678
4679Third syncing method: *:syn-sync-third*
4680
4681For the third method, only the "minlines={N}" argument needs to be given.
4682Vim will subtract {N} from the line number and start parsing there. This
4683means {N} extra lines need to be parsed, which makes this method a bit slower.
4684Example: >
4685 :syntax sync minlines=50
4686
4687"lines" is equivalent to "minlines" (used by older versions).
4688
4689
4690Fourth syncing method: *:syn-sync-fourth*
4691
4692The idea is to synchronize on the end of a few specific regions, called a
4693sync pattern. Only regions can cross lines, so when we find the end of some
4694region, we might be able to know in which syntax item we are. The search
4695starts in the line just above the one where redrawing starts. From there
4696the search continues backwards in the file.
4697
4698This works just like the non-syncing syntax items. You can use contained
4699matches, nextgroup, etc. But there are a few differences:
4700- Keywords cannot be used.
4701- The syntax items with the "sync" keyword form a completely separated group
4702 of syntax items. You can't mix syncing groups and non-syncing groups.
4703- The matching works backwards in the buffer (line by line), instead of
4704 forwards.
4705- A line continuation pattern can be given. It is used to decide which group
4706 of lines need to be searched like they were one line. This means that the
4707 search for a match with the specified items starts in the first of the
Bram Moolenaarc8cdf0f2021-03-13 13:28:13 +01004708 consecutive lines that contain the continuation pattern.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004709- When using "nextgroup" or "contains", this only works within one line (or
4710 group of continued lines).
4711- When using a region, it must start and end in the same line (or group of
4712 continued lines). Otherwise the end is assumed to be at the end of the
4713 line (or group of continued lines).
4714- When a match with a sync pattern is found, the rest of the line (or group of
4715 continued lines) is searched for another match. The last match is used.
4716 This is used when a line can contain both the start end the end of a region
4717 (e.g., in a C-comment like /* this */, the last "*/" is used).
4718
4719There are two ways how a match with a sync pattern can be used:
47201. Parsing for highlighting starts where redrawing starts (and where the
4721 search for the sync pattern started). The syntax group that is expected
4722 to be valid there must be specified. This works well when the regions
4723 that cross lines cannot contain other regions.
47242. Parsing for highlighting continues just after the match. The syntax group
4725 that is expected to be present just after the match must be specified.
4726 This can be used when the previous method doesn't work well. It's much
4727 slower, because more text needs to be parsed.
4728Both types of sync patterns can be used at the same time.
4729
4730Besides the sync patterns, other matches and regions can be specified, to
4731avoid finding unwanted matches.
4732
4733[The reason that the sync patterns are given separately, is that mostly the
4734search for the sync point can be much simpler than figuring out the
4735highlighting. The reduced number of patterns means it will go (much)
4736faster.]
4737
4738 *syn-sync-grouphere* *E393* *E394*
4739 :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} grouphere {group-name} "pattern" ..
4740
4741 Define a match that is used for syncing. {group-name} is the
4742 name of a syntax group that follows just after the match. Parsing
4743 of the text for highlighting starts just after the match. A region
4744 must exist for this {group-name}. The first one defined will be used.
4745 "NONE" can be used for when there is no syntax group after the match.
4746
4747 *syn-sync-groupthere*
4748 :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} groupthere {group-name} "pattern" ..
4749
4750 Like "grouphere", but {group-name} is the name of a syntax group that
4751 is to be used at the start of the line where searching for the sync
4752 point started. The text between the match and the start of the sync
4753 pattern searching is assumed not to change the syntax highlighting.
4754 For example, in C you could search backwards for "/*" and "*/". If
4755 "/*" is found first, you know that you are inside a comment, so the
4756 "groupthere" is "cComment". If "*/" is found first, you know that you
4757 are not in a comment, so the "groupthere" is "NONE". (in practice
4758 it's a bit more complicated, because the "/*" and "*/" could appear
4759 inside a string. That's left as an exercise to the reader...).
4760
4761 :syntax sync match ..
4762 :syntax sync region ..
4763
4764 Without a "groupthere" argument. Define a region or match that is
4765 skipped while searching for a sync point.
4766
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00004767 *syn-sync-linecont*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004768 :syntax sync linecont {pattern}
4769
4770 When {pattern} matches in a line, it is considered to continue in
4771 the next line. This means that the search for a sync point will
4772 consider the lines to be concatenated.
4773
4774If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given too, the number of lines that are
4775searched for a match is restricted to N. This is useful if you have very
4776few things to sync on and a slow machine. Example: >
4777 :syntax sync maxlines=100
4778
4779You can clear all sync settings with: >
4780 :syntax sync clear
4781
4782You can clear specific sync patterns with: >
4783 :syntax sync clear {sync-group-name} ..
4784
4785==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100478612. Listing syntax items *:syntax* *:sy* *:syn* *:syn-list*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004787
Bram Moolenaar482aaeb2005-09-29 18:26:07 +00004788This command lists all the syntax items: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004789
4790 :sy[ntax] [list]
4791
4792To show the syntax items for one syntax group: >
4793
4794 :sy[ntax] list {group-name}
4795
Bram Moolenaar24ea3ba2010-09-19 19:01:21 +02004796To list the syntax groups in one cluster: *E392* >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004797
4798 :sy[ntax] list @{cluster-name}
4799
4800See above for other arguments for the ":syntax" command.
4801
4802Note that the ":syntax" command can be abbreviated to ":sy", although ":syn"
4803is mostly used, because it looks better.
4804
4805==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100480613. Highlight command *:highlight* *:hi* *E28* *E411* *E415*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004807
4808There are three types of highlight groups:
4809- The ones used for specific languages. For these the name starts with the
4810 name of the language. Many of these don't have any attributes, but are
4811 linked to a group of the second type.
4812- The ones used for all syntax languages.
4813- The ones used for the 'highlight' option.
4814 *hitest.vim*
4815You can see all the groups currently active with this command: >
4816 :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/hitest.vim
4817This will open a new window containing all highlight group names, displayed
4818in their own color.
4819
4820 *:colo* *:colorscheme* *E185*
Bram Moolenaar00a927d2010-05-14 23:24:24 +02004821:colo[rscheme] Output the name of the currently active color scheme.
4822 This is basically the same as >
4823 :echo g:colors_name
4824< In case g:colors_name has not been defined :colo will
4825 output "default". When compiled without the |+eval|
4826 feature it will output "unknown".
4827
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004828:colo[rscheme] {name} Load color scheme {name}. This searches 'runtimepath'
Bram Moolenaarbc488a72013-07-05 21:01:22 +02004829 for the file "colors/{name}.vim". The first one that
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004830 is found is loaded.
Bram Moolenaare18c0b32016-03-20 21:08:34 +01004831 Also searches all plugins in 'packpath', first below
4832 "start" and then under "opt".
4833
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004834 Doesn't work recursively, thus you can't use
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004835 ":colorscheme" in a color scheme script.
Bram Moolenaarb4ada792016-10-30 21:55:26 +01004836
Bram Moolenaar113cb512021-11-07 20:27:04 +00004837 You have two options for customizing a color scheme.
4838 For changing the appearance of specific colors, you
4839 can redefine a color name before loading the scheme.
4840 The desert scheme uses the khaki color for the cursor.
4841 To use a darker variation of the same color: >
4842
4843 let v:colornames['khaki'] = '#bdb76b'
4844 colorscheme desert
4845<
4846 For further customization, such as changing
4847 |:highlight-link| associations, use another name, e.g.
Bram Moolenaarb4ada792016-10-30 21:55:26 +01004848 "~/.vim/colors/mine.vim", and use `:runtime` to load
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004849 the original color scheme: >
Bram Moolenaarb4ada792016-10-30 21:55:26 +01004850 runtime colors/evening.vim
4851 hi Statement ctermfg=Blue guifg=Blue
4852
Bram Moolenaar113cb512021-11-07 20:27:04 +00004853< Before the color scheme will be loaded all default
4854 color list scripts (`colors/lists/default.vim`) will
4855 be executed and then the |ColorSchemePre| autocommand
4856 event is triggered. After the color scheme has been
4857 loaded the |ColorScheme| autocommand event is
4858 triggered.
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004859 For info about writing a color scheme file: >
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00004860 :edit $VIMRUNTIME/colors/README.txt
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004861
4862:hi[ghlight] List all the current highlight groups that have
4863 attributes set.
4864
4865:hi[ghlight] {group-name}
4866 List one highlight group.
4867
Yegappan Lakshmanand1a8d652021-11-03 21:56:45 +00004868 *highlight-clear*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004869:hi[ghlight] clear Reset all highlighting to the defaults. Removes all
4870 highlighting for groups added by the user!
4871 Uses the current value of 'background' to decide which
4872 default colors to use.
Bram Moolenaar213da552020-09-17 19:59:26 +02004873 If there was a default link, restore it. |:hi-link|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004874
4875:hi[ghlight] clear {group-name}
4876:hi[ghlight] {group-name} NONE
4877 Disable the highlighting for one highlight group. It
4878 is _not_ set back to the default colors.
4879
4880:hi[ghlight] [default] {group-name} {key}={arg} ..
4881 Add a highlight group, or change the highlighting for
Bram Moolenaar113cb512021-11-07 20:27:04 +00004882 an existing group. If a given color name is not
Bram Moolenaar519cc552021-11-16 19:18:26 +00004883 recognized, each `colors/lists/default.vim` found on
Bram Moolenaar113cb512021-11-07 20:27:04 +00004884 |'runtimepath'| will be loaded.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004885 See |highlight-args| for the {key}={arg} arguments.
4886 See |:highlight-default| for the optional [default]
4887 argument.
4888
4889Normally a highlight group is added once when starting up. This sets the
4890default values for the highlighting. After that, you can use additional
4891highlight commands to change the arguments that you want to set to non-default
4892values. The value "NONE" can be used to switch the value off or go back to
4893the default value.
4894
4895A simple way to change colors is with the |:colorscheme| command. This loads
4896a file with ":highlight" commands such as this: >
4897
4898 :hi Comment gui=bold
4899
4900Note that all settings that are not included remain the same, only the
4901specified field is used, and settings are merged with previous ones. So, the
4902result is like this single command has been used: >
4903 :hi Comment term=bold ctermfg=Cyan guifg=#80a0ff gui=bold
4904<
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00004905 *:highlight-verbose*
Bram Moolenaar661b1822005-07-28 22:36:45 +00004906When listing a highlight group and 'verbose' is non-zero, the listing will
4907also tell where it was last set. Example: >
4908 :verbose hi Comment
4909< Comment xxx term=bold ctermfg=4 guifg=Blue ~
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00004910 Last set from /home/mool/vim/vim7/runtime/syntax/syncolor.vim ~
Bram Moolenaar661b1822005-07-28 22:36:45 +00004911
Bram Moolenaar8aff23a2005-08-19 20:40:30 +00004912When ":hi clear" is used then the script where this command is used will be
4913mentioned for the default values. See |:verbose-cmd| for more information.
Bram Moolenaar661b1822005-07-28 22:36:45 +00004914
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004915 *highlight-args* *E416* *E417* *E423*
4916There are three types of terminals for highlighting:
4917term a normal terminal (vt100, xterm)
Bram Moolenaar5666fcd2019-12-26 14:35:26 +01004918cterm a color terminal (MS-Windows console, color-xterm, these have the "Co"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004919 termcap entry)
4920gui the GUI
4921
4922For each type the highlighting can be given. This makes it possible to use
4923the same syntax file on all terminals, and use the optimal highlighting.
4924
49251. highlight arguments for normal terminals
4926
Bram Moolenaar75c50c42005-06-04 22:06:24 +00004927 *bold* *underline* *undercurl*
4928 *inverse* *italic* *standout*
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004929 *nocombine* *strikethrough*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004930term={attr-list} *attr-list* *highlight-term* *E418*
4931 attr-list is a comma separated list (without spaces) of the
4932 following items (in any order):
4933 bold
4934 underline
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00004935 undercurl not always available
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004936 strikethrough not always available
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004937 reverse
4938 inverse same as reverse
4939 italic
4940 standout
Bram Moolenaar0cd2a942017-08-12 15:12:30 +02004941 nocombine override attributes instead of combining them
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004942 NONE no attributes used (used to reset it)
4943
4944 Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They
4945 have the same effect.
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00004946 "undercurl" is a curly underline. When "undercurl" is not possible
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004947 then "underline" is used. In general "undercurl" and "strikethrough"
Bram Moolenaaracc22402020-06-07 21:07:18 +02004948 are only available in the GUI and some terminals. The color is set
4949 with |highlight-guisp| or |highlight-ctermul|. You can try these
4950 termcap entries to make undercurl work in a terminal: >
4951 let &t_Cs = "\e[4:3m"
4952 let &t_Ce = "\e[4:0m"
4953
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004954
4955start={term-list} *highlight-start* *E422*
4956stop={term-list} *term-list* *highlight-stop*
4957 These lists of terminal codes can be used to get
4958 non-standard attributes on a terminal.
4959
4960 The escape sequence specified with the "start" argument
4961 is written before the characters in the highlighted
4962 area. It can be anything that you want to send to the
4963 terminal to highlight this area. The escape sequence
4964 specified with the "stop" argument is written after the
4965 highlighted area. This should undo the "start" argument.
4966 Otherwise the screen will look messed up.
4967
4968 The {term-list} can have two forms:
4969
4970 1. A string with escape sequences.
4971 This is any string of characters, except that it can't start with
4972 "t_" and blanks are not allowed. The <> notation is recognized
4973 here, so you can use things like "<Esc>" and "<Space>". Example:
4974 start=<Esc>[27h;<Esc>[<Space>r;
4975
4976 2. A list of terminal codes.
4977 Each terminal code has the form "t_xx", where "xx" is the name of
4978 the termcap entry. The codes have to be separated with commas.
4979 White space is not allowed. Example:
4980 start=t_C1,t_BL
4981 The terminal codes must exist for this to work.
4982
4983
49842. highlight arguments for color terminals
4985
4986cterm={attr-list} *highlight-cterm*
4987 See above for the description of {attr-list} |attr-list|.
4988 The "cterm" argument is likely to be different from "term", when
4989 colors are used. For example, in a normal terminal comments could
4990 be underlined, in a color terminal they can be made Blue.
Bram Moolenaar68e65602019-05-26 21:33:31 +02004991 Note: Some terminals (e.g., DOS console) can't mix these attributes
4992 with coloring. To be portable, use only one of "cterm=" OR "ctermfg="
4993 OR "ctermbg=".
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004994
4995ctermfg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermfg* *E421*
4996ctermbg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermbg*
Bram Moolenaare023e882020-05-31 16:42:30 +02004997ctermul={color-nr} *highlight-ctermul*
4998 These give the foreground (ctermfg), background (ctermbg) and
4999 underline (ctermul) color to use in the terminal.
5000
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005001 The {color-nr} argument is a color number. Its range is zero to
5002 (not including) the number given by the termcap entry "Co".
5003 The actual color with this number depends on the type of terminal
5004 and its settings. Sometimes the color also depends on the settings of
5005 "cterm". For example, on some systems "cterm=bold ctermfg=3" gives
5006 another color, on others you just get color 3.
5007
5008 For an xterm this depends on your resources, and is a bit
5009 unpredictable. See your xterm documentation for the defaults. The
5010 colors for a color-xterm can be changed from the .Xdefaults file.
5011 Unfortunately this means that it's not possible to get the same colors
5012 for each user. See |xterm-color| for info about color xterms.
Bram Moolenaard2ea7cf2021-05-30 20:54:13 +02005013 *tmux*
5014 When using tmux you may want to use this in the tmux config: >
5015 # tmux colors
Bram Moolenaar2346a632021-06-13 19:02:49 +02005016 set -s default-terminal "tmux-256color"
5017 set -as terminal-overrides ",*-256color:Tc"
Bram Moolenaard2ea7cf2021-05-30 20:54:13 +02005018< More info at:
5019 https://github.com/tmux/tmux/wiki/FAQ#how-do-i-use-a-256-colour-terminal
5020 https://github.com/tmux/tmux/wiki/FAQ#how-do-i-use-rgb-colour
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005021
Bram Moolenaar5666fcd2019-12-26 14:35:26 +01005022 The MS-Windows standard colors are fixed (in a console window), so
5023 these have been used for the names. But the meaning of color names in
5024 X11 are fixed, so these color settings have been used, to make the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005025 highlighting settings portable (complicated, isn't it?). The
5026 following names are recognized, with the color number used:
5027
5028 *cterm-colors*
5029 NR-16 NR-8 COLOR NAME ~
5030 0 0 Black
5031 1 4 DarkBlue
5032 2 2 DarkGreen
5033 3 6 DarkCyan
5034 4 1 DarkRed
5035 5 5 DarkMagenta
5036 6 3 Brown, DarkYellow
5037 7 7 LightGray, LightGrey, Gray, Grey
5038 8 0* DarkGray, DarkGrey
5039 9 4* Blue, LightBlue
5040 10 2* Green, LightGreen
5041 11 6* Cyan, LightCyan
5042 12 1* Red, LightRed
5043 13 5* Magenta, LightMagenta
5044 14 3* Yellow, LightYellow
5045 15 7* White
5046
5047 The number under "NR-16" is used for 16-color terminals ('t_Co'
5048 greater than or equal to 16). The number under "NR-8" is used for
5049 8-color terminals ('t_Co' less than 16). The '*' indicates that the
5050 bold attribute is set for ctermfg. In many 8-color terminals (e.g.,
5051 "linux"), this causes the bright colors to appear. This doesn't work
5052 for background colors! Without the '*' the bold attribute is removed.
5053 If you want to set the bold attribute in a different way, put a
5054 "cterm=" argument AFTER the "ctermfg=" or "ctermbg=" argument. Or use
5055 a number instead of a color name.
5056
5057 The case of the color names is ignored.
5058 Note that for 16 color ansi style terminals (including xterms), the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005059 numbers in the NR-8 column is used. Here '*' means 'add 8' so that Blue
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005060 is 12, DarkGray is 8 etc.
5061
5062 Note that for some color terminals these names may result in the wrong
5063 colors!
5064
Bram Moolenaar5837f1f2015-03-21 18:06:14 +01005065 You can also use "NONE" to remove the color.
5066
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005067 *:hi-normal-cterm*
5068 When setting the "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" colors for the Normal group,
5069 these will become the colors used for the non-highlighted text.
5070 Example: >
5071 :highlight Normal ctermfg=grey ctermbg=darkblue
5072< When setting the "ctermbg" color for the Normal group, the
Bram Moolenaar6aa8cea2017-06-05 14:44:35 +02005073 'background' option will be adjusted automatically, under the
5074 condition that the color is recognized and 'background' was not set
5075 explicitly. This causes the highlight groups that depend on
5076 'background' to change! This means you should set the colors for
5077 Normal first, before setting other colors.
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02005078 When a color scheme is being used, changing 'background' causes it to
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005079 be reloaded, which may reset all colors (including Normal). First
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01005080 delete the "g:colors_name" variable when you don't want this.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005081
5082 When you have set "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" for the Normal group, Vim
5083 needs to reset the color when exiting. This is done with the "op"
5084 termcap entry |t_op|. If this doesn't work correctly, try setting the
5085 't_op' option in your .vimrc.
Bram Moolenaare023e882020-05-31 16:42:30 +02005086 *E419* *E420* *E453*
5087 When Vim knows the normal foreground, background and underline colors,
5088 "fg", "bg" and "ul" can be used as color names. This only works after
5089 setting the colors for the Normal group and for the MS-Windows
5090 console. Example, for reverse video: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005091 :highlight Visual ctermfg=bg ctermbg=fg
5092< Note that the colors are used that are valid at the moment this
Bram Moolenaar75e15672020-06-28 13:10:22 +02005093 command is given. If the Normal group colors are changed later, the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005094 "fg" and "bg" colors will not be adjusted.
5095
5096
50973. highlight arguments for the GUI
5098
5099gui={attr-list} *highlight-gui*
5100 These give the attributes to use in the GUI mode.
5101 See |attr-list| for a description.
5102 Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They
5103 have the same effect.
5104 Note that the attributes are ignored for the "Normal" group.
5105
5106font={font-name} *highlight-font*
5107 font-name is the name of a font, as it is used on the system Vim
5108 runs on. For X11 this is a complicated name, for example: >
5109 font=-misc-fixed-bold-r-normal--14-130-75-75-c-70-iso8859-1
5110<
5111 The font-name "NONE" can be used to revert to the default font.
5112 When setting the font for the "Normal" group, this becomes the default
5113 font (until the 'guifont' option is changed; the last one set is
5114 used).
5115 The following only works with Motif and Athena, not with other GUIs:
5116 When setting the font for the "Menu" group, the menus will be changed.
5117 When setting the font for the "Tooltip" group, the tooltips will be
5118 changed.
5119 All fonts used, except for Menu and Tooltip, should be of the same
5120 character size as the default font! Otherwise redrawing problems will
5121 occur.
Bram Moolenaar82af8712016-06-04 20:20:29 +02005122 To use a font name with an embedded space or other special character,
5123 put it in single quotes. The single quote cannot be used then.
5124 Example: >
5125 :hi comment font='Monospace 10'
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005126
5127guifg={color-name} *highlight-guifg*
5128guibg={color-name} *highlight-guibg*
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00005129guisp={color-name} *highlight-guisp*
5130 These give the foreground (guifg), background (guibg) and special
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02005131 (guisp) color to use in the GUI. "guisp" is used for undercurl and
5132 strikethrough.
Bram Moolenaar7df351e2006-01-23 22:30:28 +00005133 There are a few special names:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005134 NONE no color (transparent)
5135 bg use normal background color
5136 background use normal background color
5137 fg use normal foreground color
5138 foreground use normal foreground color
5139 To use a color name with an embedded space or other special character,
5140 put it in single quotes. The single quote cannot be used then.
5141 Example: >
5142 :hi comment guifg='salmon pink'
5143<
5144 *gui-colors*
5145 Suggested color names (these are available on most systems):
5146 Red LightRed DarkRed
5147 Green LightGreen DarkGreen SeaGreen
5148 Blue LightBlue DarkBlue SlateBlue
5149 Cyan LightCyan DarkCyan
5150 Magenta LightMagenta DarkMagenta
5151 Yellow LightYellow Brown DarkYellow
5152 Gray LightGray DarkGray
5153 Black White
5154 Orange Purple Violet
5155
5156 In the Win32 GUI version, additional system colors are available. See
5157 |win32-colors|.
5158
5159 You can also specify a color by its Red, Green and Blue values.
5160 The format is "#rrggbb", where
5161 "rr" is the Red value
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005162 "gg" is the Green value
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00005163 "bb" is the Blue value
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005164 All values are hexadecimal, range from "00" to "ff". Examples: >
Drew Vogele30d1022021-10-24 20:35:07 +01005165 :highlight Comment guifg=#11f0c3 guibg=#ff00ff
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005166<
Drew Vogele30d1022021-10-24 20:35:07 +01005167 If you are authoring a color scheme and use the same hexademical value
5168 repeatedly, you can define a name for it in |v:colornames|. For
5169 example: >
5170
5171 # provide a default value for this color but allow the user to
5172 # override it.
5173 :call extend(v:colornames, {'alt_turquoise': '#11f0c3'}, 'keep')
5174 :highlight Comment guifg=alt_turquoise guibg=magenta
5175<
5176 If you are using a color scheme that relies on named colors and you
5177 would like to adjust the precise appearance of those colors, you can
5178 do so by overriding the values in |v:colornames| prior to loading the
5179 scheme: >
5180
5181 let v:colornames['alt_turquoise'] = '#22f0d3'
5182 colorscheme alt
5183<
5184 If you want to develop a color list that can be relied on by others,
5185 it is best to prefix your color names. By convention these color lists
5186 are placed in the colors/lists directory. You can see an example in
5187 '$VIMRUNTIME/colors/lists/csscolors.vim'. This list would be sourced
5188 by a color scheme using: >
5189
5190 :runtime colors/lists/csscolors.vim
5191 :highlight Comment guifg=css_turquoise
5192<
5193
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005194 *highlight-groups* *highlight-default*
5195These are the default highlighting groups. These groups are used by the
5196'highlight' option default. Note that the highlighting depends on the value
5197of 'background'. You can see the current settings with the ":highlight"
5198command.
Bram Moolenaar1a384422010-07-14 19:53:30 +02005199 *hl-ColorColumn*
5200ColorColumn used for the columns set with 'colorcolumn'
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005201 *hl-Conceal*
5202Conceal placeholder characters substituted for concealed
5203 text (see 'conceallevel')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005204 *hl-Cursor*
5205Cursor the character under the cursor
Bram Moolenaarf90b6e02019-05-09 19:26:38 +02005206lCursor the character under the cursor when |language-mapping|
5207 is used (see 'guicursor')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005208 *hl-CursorIM*
5209CursorIM like Cursor, but used when in IME mode |CursorIM|
Bram Moolenaar5316eee2006-03-12 22:11:10 +00005210 *hl-CursorColumn*
5211CursorColumn the screen column that the cursor is in when 'cursorcolumn' is
5212 set
5213 *hl-CursorLine*
5214CursorLine the screen line that the cursor is in when 'cursorline' is
5215 set
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005216 *hl-Directory*
5217Directory directory names (and other special names in listings)
5218 *hl-DiffAdd*
5219DiffAdd diff mode: Added line |diff.txt|
5220 *hl-DiffChange*
5221DiffChange diff mode: Changed line |diff.txt|
5222 *hl-DiffDelete*
5223DiffDelete diff mode: Deleted line |diff.txt|
5224 *hl-DiffText*
5225DiffText diff mode: Changed text within a changed line |diff.txt|
Bram Moolenaardc1f1642016-08-16 18:33:43 +02005226 *hl-EndOfBuffer*
Bram Moolenaar58b85342016-08-14 19:54:54 +02005227EndOfBuffer filler lines (~) after the last line in the buffer.
5228 By default, this is highlighted like |hl-NonText|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005229 *hl-ErrorMsg*
5230ErrorMsg error messages on the command line
5231 *hl-VertSplit*
5232VertSplit the column separating vertically split windows
5233 *hl-Folded*
5234Folded line used for closed folds
5235 *hl-FoldColumn*
5236FoldColumn 'foldcolumn'
5237 *hl-SignColumn*
5238SignColumn column where |signs| are displayed
5239 *hl-IncSearch*
5240IncSearch 'incsearch' highlighting; also used for the text replaced with
5241 ":s///c"
5242 *hl-LineNr*
Bram Moolenaarfd2ac762006-03-01 22:09:21 +00005243LineNr Line number for ":number" and ":#" commands, and when 'number'
Bram Moolenaar64486672010-05-16 15:46:46 +02005244 or 'relativenumber' option is set.
Bram Moolenaarefae76a2019-10-27 22:54:58 +01005245 *hl-LineNrAbove*
5246LineNrAbove Line number for when the 'relativenumber'
5247 option is set, above the cursor line.
5248 *hl-LineNrBelow*
5249LineNrBelow Line number for when the 'relativenumber'
5250 option is set, below the cursor line.
Bram Moolenaar61d35bd2012-03-28 20:51:51 +02005251 *hl-CursorLineNr*
Bram Moolenaar89a9c152021-08-29 21:55:35 +02005252CursorLineNr Like LineNr when 'cursorline' is set and 'cursorlineopt'
5253 contains "number" or is "both", for the cursor line.
Bram Moolenaarfd2ac762006-03-01 22:09:21 +00005254 *hl-MatchParen*
5255MatchParen The character under the cursor or just before it, if it
5256 is a paired bracket, and its match. |pi_paren.txt|
5257
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005258 *hl-ModeMsg*
5259ModeMsg 'showmode' message (e.g., "-- INSERT --")
5260 *hl-MoreMsg*
5261MoreMsg |more-prompt|
5262 *hl-NonText*
Bram Moolenaar58b85342016-08-14 19:54:54 +02005263NonText '@' at the end of the window, characters from 'showbreak'
5264 and other characters that do not really exist in the text
5265 (e.g., ">" displayed when a double-wide character doesn't
5266 fit at the end of the line).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005267 *hl-Normal*
5268Normal normal text
Bram Moolenaar1c7715d2005-10-03 22:02:18 +00005269 *hl-Pmenu*
5270Pmenu Popup menu: normal item.
5271 *hl-PmenuSel*
5272PmenuSel Popup menu: selected item.
5273 *hl-PmenuSbar*
5274PmenuSbar Popup menu: scrollbar.
5275 *hl-PmenuThumb*
5276PmenuThumb Popup menu: Thumb of the scrollbar.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005277 *hl-Question*
5278Question |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions
Bram Moolenaar74675a62017-07-15 13:53:23 +02005279 *hl-QuickFixLine*
5280QuickFixLine Current |quickfix| item in the quickfix window.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005281 *hl-Search*
5282Search Last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch').
Bram Moolenaar74675a62017-07-15 13:53:23 +02005283 Also used for similar items that need to stand out.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005284 *hl-SpecialKey*
5285SpecialKey Meta and special keys listed with ":map", also for text used
5286 to show unprintable characters in the text, 'listchars'.
5287 Generally: text that is displayed differently from what it
5288 really is.
Bram Moolenaar217ad922005-03-20 22:37:15 +00005289 *hl-SpellBad*
5290SpellBad Word that is not recognized by the spellchecker. |spell|
5291 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
Bram Moolenaar53180ce2005-07-05 21:48:14 +00005292 *hl-SpellCap*
5293SpellCap Word that should start with a capital. |spell|
5294 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
Bram Moolenaar217ad922005-03-20 22:37:15 +00005295 *hl-SpellLocal*
5296SpellLocal Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is
5297 used in another region. |spell|
5298 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
5299 *hl-SpellRare*
5300SpellRare Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is
5301 hardly ever used. |spell|
5302 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005303 *hl-StatusLine*
5304StatusLine status line of current window
5305 *hl-StatusLineNC*
5306StatusLineNC status lines of not-current windows
5307 Note: if this is equal to "StatusLine" Vim will use "^^^" in
5308 the status line of the current window.
Bram Moolenaar40962ec2018-01-28 22:47:25 +01005309 *hl-StatusLineTerm*
5310StatusLineTerm status line of current window, if it is a |terminal| window.
5311 *hl-StatusLineTermNC*
5312StatusLineTermNC status lines of not-current windows that is a |terminal|
5313 window.
Bram Moolenaarfaa959a2006-02-20 21:37:40 +00005314 *hl-TabLine*
5315TabLine tab pages line, not active tab page label
5316 *hl-TabLineFill*
5317TabLineFill tab pages line, where there are no labels
5318 *hl-TabLineSel*
5319TabLineSel tab pages line, active tab page label
Bram Moolenaardf980db2017-12-24 13:22:00 +01005320 *hl-Terminal*
5321Terminal |terminal| window (see |terminal-size-color|)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005322 *hl-Title*
5323Title titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc.
5324 *hl-Visual*
5325Visual Visual mode selection
5326 *hl-VisualNOS*
5327VisualNOS Visual mode selection when vim is "Not Owning the Selection".
5328 Only X11 Gui's |gui-x11| and |xterm-clipboard| supports this.
5329 *hl-WarningMsg*
5330WarningMsg warning messages
5331 *hl-WildMenu*
5332WildMenu current match in 'wildmenu' completion
5333
Bram Moolenaarf75a9632005-09-13 21:20:47 +00005334 *hl-User1* *hl-User1..9* *hl-User9*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005335The 'statusline' syntax allows the use of 9 different highlights in the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005336statusline and ruler (via 'rulerformat'). The names are User1 to User9.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005337
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00005338For the GUI you can use the following groups to set the colors for the menu,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005339scrollbars and tooltips. They don't have defaults. This doesn't work for the
5340Win32 GUI. Only three highlight arguments have any effect here: font, guibg,
5341and guifg.
5342
5343 *hl-Menu*
5344Menu Current font, background and foreground colors of the menus.
5345 Also used for the toolbar.
5346 Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg.
5347
5348 NOTE: For Motif and Athena the font argument actually
5349 specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is
5350 empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when
5351 set.
5352
5353 *hl-Scrollbar*
5354Scrollbar Current background and foreground of the main window's
5355 scrollbars.
5356 Applicable highlight arguments: guibg, guifg.
5357
5358 *hl-Tooltip*
5359Tooltip Current font, background and foreground of the tooltips.
5360 Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg.
5361
5362 NOTE: For Motif and Athena the font argument actually
5363 specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is
5364 empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when
5365 set.
5366
5367==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100536814. Linking groups *:hi-link* *:highlight-link* *E412* *E413*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005369
5370When you want to use the same highlighting for several syntax groups, you
5371can do this more easily by linking the groups into one common highlight
5372group, and give the color attributes only for that group.
5373
5374To set a link:
5375
5376 :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} {to-group}
5377
5378To remove a link:
5379
5380 :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} NONE
5381
5382Notes: *E414*
5383- If the {from-group} and/or {to-group} doesn't exist, it is created. You
5384 don't get an error message for a non-existing group.
5385- As soon as you use a ":highlight" command for a linked group, the link is
5386 removed.
5387- If there are already highlight settings for the {from-group}, the link is
5388 not made, unless the '!' is given. For a ":highlight link" command in a
5389 sourced file, you don't get an error message. This can be used to skip
5390 links for groups that already have settings.
5391
5392 *:hi-default* *:highlight-default*
5393The [default] argument is used for setting the default highlighting for a
5394group. If highlighting has already been specified for the group the command
5395will be ignored. Also when there is an existing link.
5396
5397Using [default] is especially useful to overrule the highlighting of a
5398specific syntax file. For example, the C syntax file contains: >
5399 :highlight default link cComment Comment
5400If you like Question highlighting for C comments, put this in your vimrc file: >
5401 :highlight link cComment Question
5402Without the "default" in the C syntax file, the highlighting would be
5403overruled when the syntax file is loaded.
5404
Bram Moolenaar23515b42020-11-29 14:36:24 +01005405To have a link survive `:highlight clear`, which is useful if you have
5406highlighting for a specific filetype and you want to keep it when selecting
5407another color scheme, put a command like this in the
5408"after/syntax/{filetype}.vim" file: >
5409 highlight! default link cComment Question
5410
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005411==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100541215. Cleaning up *:syn-clear* *E391*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005413
5414If you want to clear the syntax stuff for the current buffer, you can use this
5415command: >
5416 :syntax clear
5417
5418This command should be used when you want to switch off syntax highlighting,
5419or when you want to switch to using another syntax. It's normally not needed
5420in a syntax file itself, because syntax is cleared by the autocommands that
5421load the syntax file.
5422The command also deletes the "b:current_syntax" variable, since no syntax is
5423loaded after this command.
5424
Bram Moolenaar61da1bf2019-06-06 12:14:49 +02005425To clean up specific syntax groups for the current buffer: >
5426 :syntax clear {group-name} ..
5427This removes all patterns and keywords for {group-name}.
5428
5429To clean up specific syntax group lists for the current buffer: >
5430 :syntax clear @{grouplist-name} ..
5431This sets {grouplist-name}'s contents to an empty list.
5432
5433 *:syntax-off* *:syn-off*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005434If you want to disable syntax highlighting for all buffers, you need to remove
5435the autocommands that load the syntax files: >
5436 :syntax off
5437
5438What this command actually does, is executing the command >
5439 :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
5440See the "nosyntax.vim" file for details. Note that for this to work
5441$VIMRUNTIME must be valid. See |$VIMRUNTIME|.
5442
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005443 *:syntax-reset* *:syn-reset*
5444If you have changed the colors and messed them up, use this command to get the
5445defaults back: >
5446
5447 :syntax reset
5448
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +02005449It is a bit of a wrong name, since it does not reset any syntax items, it only
5450affects the highlighting.
5451
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005452This doesn't change the colors for the 'highlight' option.
5453
5454Note that the syntax colors that you set in your vimrc file will also be reset
5455back to their Vim default.
5456Note that if you are using a color scheme, the colors defined by the color
5457scheme for syntax highlighting will be lost.
5458
5459What this actually does is: >
5460
5461 let g:syntax_cmd = "reset"
5462 runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim
5463
5464Note that this uses the 'runtimepath' option.
5465
5466 *syncolor*
5467If you want to use different colors for syntax highlighting, you can add a Vim
5468script file to set these colors. Put this file in a directory in
5469'runtimepath' which comes after $VIMRUNTIME, so that your settings overrule
5470the default colors. This way these colors will be used after the ":syntax
5471reset" command.
5472
5473For Unix you can use the file ~/.vim/after/syntax/syncolor.vim. Example: >
5474
5475 if &background == "light"
5476 highlight comment ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen
5477 else
5478 highlight comment ctermfg=green guifg=green
5479 endif
Bram Moolenaar88a42052021-11-21 21:13:36 +00005480<
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00005481 *E679*
5482Do make sure this syncolor.vim script does not use a "syntax on", set the
5483'background' option or uses a "colorscheme" command, because it results in an
5484endless loop.
5485
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005486Note that when a color scheme is used, there might be some confusion whether
5487your defined colors are to be used or the colors from the scheme. This
5488depends on the color scheme file. See |:colorscheme|.
5489
5490 *syntax_cmd*
5491The "syntax_cmd" variable is set to one of these values when the
5492syntax/syncolor.vim files are loaded:
Bram Moolenaar88a42052021-11-21 21:13:36 +00005493 "on" `:syntax on` command. Highlight colors are overruled but
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005494 links are kept
Bram Moolenaar88a42052021-11-21 21:13:36 +00005495 "enable" `:syntax enable` command. Only define colors for groups that
5496 don't have highlighting yet. Use `:highlight default` .
5497 "reset" `:syntax reset` command or loading a color scheme. Define all
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005498 the colors.
5499 "skip" Don't define colors. Used to skip the default settings when a
5500 syncolor.vim file earlier in 'runtimepath' has already set
5501 them.
5502
5503==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100550416. Highlighting tags *tag-highlight*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005505
5506If you want to highlight all the tags in your file, you can use the following
5507mappings.
5508
5509 <F11> -- Generate tags.vim file, and highlight tags.
5510 <F12> -- Just highlight tags based on existing tags.vim file.
5511>
5512 :map <F11> :sp tags<CR>:%s/^\([^ :]*:\)\=\([^ ]*\).*/syntax keyword Tag \2/<CR>:wq! tags.vim<CR>/^<CR><F12>
5513 :map <F12> :so tags.vim<CR>
5514
5515WARNING: The longer the tags file, the slower this will be, and the more
5516memory Vim will consume.
5517
5518Only highlighting typedefs, unions and structs can be done too. For this you
5519must use Exuberant ctags (found at http://ctags.sf.net).
5520
5521Put these lines in your Makefile:
5522
5523# Make a highlight file for types. Requires Exuberant ctags and awk
5524types: types.vim
5525types.vim: *.[ch]
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00005526 ctags --c-kinds=gstu -o- *.[ch] |\
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005527 awk 'BEGIN{printf("syntax keyword Type\t")}\
5528 {printf("%s ", $$1)}END{print ""}' > $@
5529
5530And put these lines in your .vimrc: >
5531
5532 " load the types.vim highlighting file, if it exists
5533 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] let fname = expand('<afile>:p:h') . '/types.vim'
5534 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] if filereadable(fname)
5535 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] exe 'so ' . fname
5536 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] endif
5537
5538==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100553917. Window-local syntax *:ownsyntax*
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005540
5541Normally all windows on a buffer share the same syntax settings. It is
5542possible, however, to set a particular window on a file to have its own
5543private syntax setting. A possible example would be to edit LaTeX source
5544with conventional highlighting in one window, while seeing the same source
5545highlighted differently (so as to hide control sequences and indicate bold,
5546italic etc regions) in another. The 'scrollbind' option is useful here.
5547
5548To set the current window to have the syntax "foo", separately from all other
5549windows on the buffer: >
5550 :ownsyntax foo
Bram Moolenaardebe25a2010-06-06 17:41:24 +02005551< *w:current_syntax*
5552This will set the "w:current_syntax" variable to "foo". The value of
5553"b:current_syntax" does not change. This is implemented by saving and
5554restoring "b:current_syntax", since the syntax files do set
5555"b:current_syntax". The value set by the syntax file is assigned to
5556"w:current_syntax".
Bram Moolenaared32d942014-12-06 23:33:00 +01005557Note: This resets the 'spell', 'spellcapcheck' and 'spellfile' options.
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005558
5559Once a window has its own syntax, syntax commands executed from other windows
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02005560on the same buffer (including :syntax clear) have no effect. Conversely,
Bram Moolenaarbf884932013-04-05 22:26:15 +02005561syntax commands executed from that window do not affect other windows on the
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005562same buffer.
5563
Bram Moolenaardebe25a2010-06-06 17:41:24 +02005564A window with its own syntax reverts to normal behavior when another buffer
5565is loaded into that window or the file is reloaded.
5566When splitting the window, the new window will use the original syntax.
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005567
5568==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100556918. Color xterms *xterm-color* *color-xterm*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005570
5571Most color xterms have only eight colors. If you don't get colors with the
5572default setup, it should work with these lines in your .vimrc: >
5573 :if &term =~ "xterm"
5574 : if has("terminfo")
5575 : set t_Co=8
5576 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%p1%dm
5577 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%p1%dm
5578 : else
5579 : set t_Co=8
5580 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm
5581 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm
5582 : endif
5583 :endif
5584< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]
5585
5586You might want to change the first "if" to match the name of your terminal,
5587e.g. "dtterm" instead of "xterm".
5588
5589Note: Do these settings BEFORE doing ":syntax on". Otherwise the colors may
5590be wrong.
5591 *xiterm* *rxvt*
5592The above settings have been mentioned to work for xiterm and rxvt too.
5593But for using 16 colors in an rxvt these should work with terminfo: >
5594 :set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t25;%p1%{40}%+%e5;%p1%{32}%+%;%dm
5595 :set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t22;%p1%{30}%+%e1;%p1%{22}%+%;%dm
5596<
5597 *colortest.vim*
5598To test your color setup, a file has been included in the Vim distribution.
Bram Moolenaarf740b292006-02-16 22:11:02 +00005599To use it, execute this command: >
5600 :runtime syntax/colortest.vim
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005601
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005602Some versions of xterm (and other terminals, like the Linux console) can
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005603output lighter foreground colors, even though the number of colors is defined
5604at 8. Therefore Vim sets the "cterm=bold" attribute for light foreground
5605colors, when 't_Co' is 8.
5606
5607 *xfree-xterm*
5608To get 16 colors or more, get the newest xterm version (which should be
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005609included with XFree86 3.3 and later). You can also find the latest version
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005610at: >
5611 http://invisible-island.net/xterm/xterm.html
5612Here is a good way to configure it. This uses 88 colors and enables the
5613termcap-query feature, which allows Vim to ask the xterm how many colors it
5614supports. >
5615 ./configure --disable-bold-color --enable-88-color --enable-tcap-query
5616If you only get 8 colors, check the xterm compilation settings.
5617(Also see |UTF8-xterm| for using this xterm with UTF-8 character encoding).
5618
5619This xterm should work with these lines in your .vimrc (for 16 colors): >
5620 :if has("terminfo")
5621 : set t_Co=16
5622 : set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{92}%+%;%dm
5623 : set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{82}%+%;%dm
5624 :else
5625 : set t_Co=16
5626 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm
5627 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm
5628 :endif
5629< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]
5630
5631Without |+terminfo|, Vim will recognize these settings, and automatically
5632translate cterm colors of 8 and above to "<Esc>[9%dm" and "<Esc>[10%dm".
5633Colors above 16 are also translated automatically.
5634
5635For 256 colors this has been reported to work: >
5636
5637 :set t_AB=<Esc>[48;5;%dm
5638 :set t_AF=<Esc>[38;5;%dm
5639
5640Or just set the TERM environment variable to "xterm-color" or "xterm-16color"
5641and try if that works.
5642
5643You probably want to use these X resources (in your ~/.Xdefaults file):
5644 XTerm*color0: #000000
5645 XTerm*color1: #c00000
5646 XTerm*color2: #008000
5647 XTerm*color3: #808000
5648 XTerm*color4: #0000c0
5649 XTerm*color5: #c000c0
5650 XTerm*color6: #008080
5651 XTerm*color7: #c0c0c0
5652 XTerm*color8: #808080
5653 XTerm*color9: #ff6060
5654 XTerm*color10: #00ff00
5655 XTerm*color11: #ffff00
5656 XTerm*color12: #8080ff
5657 XTerm*color13: #ff40ff
5658 XTerm*color14: #00ffff
5659 XTerm*color15: #ffffff
5660 Xterm*cursorColor: Black
5661
5662[Note: The cursorColor is required to work around a bug, which changes the
5663cursor color to the color of the last drawn text. This has been fixed by a
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00005664newer version of xterm, but not everybody is using it yet.]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005665
5666To get these right away, reload the .Xdefaults file to the X Option database
5667Manager (you only need to do this when you just changed the .Xdefaults file): >
5668 xrdb -merge ~/.Xdefaults
5669<
5670 *xterm-blink* *xterm-blinking-cursor*
5671To make the cursor blink in an xterm, see tools/blink.c. Or use Thomas
5672Dickey's xterm above patchlevel 107 (see above for where to get it), with
5673these resources:
5674 XTerm*cursorBlink: on
5675 XTerm*cursorOnTime: 400
5676 XTerm*cursorOffTime: 250
5677 XTerm*cursorColor: White
5678
5679 *hpterm-color*
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00005680These settings work (more or less) for an hpterm, which only supports 8
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005681foreground colors: >
5682 :if has("terminfo")
5683 : set t_Co=8
5684 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%p1%dS
5685 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S
5686 :else
5687 : set t_Co=8
5688 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%dS
5689 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S
5690 :endif
5691< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]
5692
5693 *Eterm* *enlightened-terminal*
5694These settings have been reported to work for the Enlightened terminal
5695emulator, or Eterm. They might work for all xterm-like terminals that use the
5696bold attribute to get bright colors. Add an ":if" like above when needed. >
5697 :set t_Co=16
5698 :set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t3%p1%d%e%p1%{22}%+%d;1%;m
5699 :set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t4%p1%d%e%p1%{32}%+%d;1%;m
5700<
5701 *TTpro-telnet*
5702These settings should work for TTpro telnet. Tera Term Pro is a freeware /
5703open-source program for MS-Windows. >
5704 set t_Co=16
5705 set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{32}%+5;%;%dm
5706 set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{22}%+1;%;%dm
5707Also make sure TTpro's Setup / Window / Full Color is enabled, and make sure
5708that Setup / Font / Enable Bold is NOT enabled.
5709(info provided by John Love-Jensen <eljay@Adobe.COM>)
5710
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005711
5712==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100571319. When syntax is slow *:syntime*
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005714
5715This is aimed at authors of a syntax file.
5716
5717If your syntax causes redrawing to be slow, here are a few hints on making it
5718faster. To see slowness switch on some features that usually interfere, such
5719as 'relativenumber' and |folding|.
5720
Bram Moolenaar203d04d2013-06-06 21:36:40 +02005721Note: this is only available when compiled with the |+profile| feature.
5722You many need to build Vim with "huge" features.
5723
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005724To find out what patterns are consuming most time, get an overview with this
5725sequence: >
5726 :syntime on
5727 [ redraw the text at least once with CTRL-L ]
5728 :syntime report
5729
5730This will display a list of syntax patterns that were used, sorted by the time
5731it took to match them against the text.
5732
5733:syntime on Start measuring syntax times. This will add some
5734 overhead to compute the time spent on syntax pattern
5735 matching.
5736
5737:syntime off Stop measuring syntax times.
5738
5739:syntime clear Set all the counters to zero, restart measuring.
5740
5741:syntime report Show the syntax items used since ":syntime on" in the
5742 current window. Use a wider display to see more of
5743 the output.
5744
5745 The list is sorted by total time. The columns are:
5746 TOTAL Total time in seconds spent on
5747 matching this pattern.
5748 COUNT Number of times the pattern was used.
5749 MATCH Number of times the pattern actually
5750 matched
5751 SLOWEST The longest time for one try.
5752 AVERAGE The average time for one try.
5753 NAME Name of the syntax item. Note that
5754 this is not unique.
5755 PATTERN The pattern being used.
5756
5757Pattern matching gets slow when it has to try many alternatives. Try to
5758include as much literal text as possible to reduce the number of ways a
5759pattern does NOT match.
5760
5761When using the "\@<=" and "\@<!" items, add a maximum size to avoid trying at
5762all positions in the current and previous line. For example, if the item is
5763literal text specify the size of that text (in bytes):
5764
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02005765"<\@<=span" Matches "span" in "<span". This tries matching with "<" in
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005766 many places.
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02005767"<\@1<=span" Matches the same, but only tries one byte before "span".
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005768
5769
Bram Moolenaar91f84f62018-07-29 15:07:52 +02005770 vim:tw=78:sw=4:ts=8:noet:ft=help:norl: